JP6989281B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine.

In this type of gaming machine, a game control means for controlling the game and an effect control means for controlling the effect in response to a command received from the game control means are provided, and the effect control means is provided from the game control means. It has been proposed that the effect control means side can specify the control state of the game control means side by transmitting a command indicating the control state of the game control means side (see, for example, Patent Document 1). ).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2002-186708

In a gaming machine as described in Patent Document 1, in order for the other control means to grasp the control state of one control means in detail, the control state changes every time the control state of one control means changes. It is necessary to send the corresponding command each time, and there is a problem that the program capacity related to the command transmission increases.

The present invention has been made by paying attention to such a problem, and the first control means transmits control information while grasping the control state of the first control means on the second control means side. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing the program capacity at the time.

(A) In a gaming machine that plays a game
The first control means and
A second control means that controls according to the control information received from the first control means, and a second control means.
Equipped with
The first control means is
The main process execution means that executes the main process that is gradually migrated,
An interrupt processing execution means that interrupts the main processing at regular intervals and executes the interrupt processing,
A control information generation means that generates control information in the main process and stores it in the control information storage area.
A control information transmitting means for transmitting control information stored in the control information storage area to the second control means in the interrupt processing, and a control information transmitting means.
Including
The interrupt processing executing means can execute a process of updating operation information indicating an operation state of a switch provided in the gaming machine in the interrupt process.
The main processing execution means is
It is possible to execute an interrupt waiting process that waits until the interrupt process interrupts the main process and is executed once.
With stepwise migration of the main process based on the operation information, it is capable of executing the pre-Symbol interruption waiting process before referring to the operation information,
When a plurality of control information by the previous SL control information generating unit is generated continuously, the interrupt-waiting to be executed prior to referring to the operation information after the generation of the product or in a plurality of control information for a plurality of control information A delay means for delaying the progress of the main process by executing the process is included.
The control information generation means generates a plurality of types of state control information capable of specifying the control state of the first control means for each of a plurality of timings including the first timing and the second timing in the unit game which is one unit game. Including state control information generation means to
The plurality of types of state control information generated by the state control information generation means at one timing are control states that can be changed between one unit game and another unit game, and are the first timing and the first timing in one unit game. It includes first state control information that can specify a control state that does not change at two timings, and second state control information that can specify a control state that can change at the first timing and the second timing in one unit game.
The state control information generation means generates a plurality of types of common state control information by common control at any of the plurality of timings.
The gaming machine of means 1 is
In a gaming machine (slot machine 1) that plays games
The first control means (main control unit 41) and
A second control means (sub control unit 91) that controls according to the control information received from the first control means, and
Equipped with
The first control means (main control unit 41) is
The main process execution means that executes the main process that is gradually migrated,
An interrupt processing execution means that interrupts the main processing at regular intervals and executes an interrupt processing (timer interrupt processing (main)).
A control information generation means that generates control information (command) in the main process and stores it in the control information storage area (command queue).
Control to transmit control information (command) stored in the control information storage area (command queue) to the second control means (sub control unit 91) in the interrupt process (timer interrupt process (main)). Information transmission means (normal command transmission processing),
Including
When a plurality of control information (commands) are continuously generated by the control information generation means, the main process execution means advances the main process during the generation of the plurality of control information or after the generation of the plurality of control information. Includes delay (timer interrupt wait processing)
The control information generation means is the first control means (main control unit) for each of a plurality of timings including the first timing (at the start of the game) and the second timing (at the end of the game) in one unit of the game (game). 41) Includes state control information generation means for generating a plurality of types of state control information (control state commands) capable of specifying the control state.
The plurality of types of state control information (control state commands) generated by the state control information transmission generation at one timing are control states that do not change between the first timing (at the start of the game) and the second timing (at the end of the game). Changes between the first state control information (control state command 2) that can specify (for example, the stop order that is advantageous for the player) and the first timing (at the start of the game) and the second timing (at the end of the game). A second state control information (control state command 1) capable of specifying a possible control state (for example, a game state) is included.
The state control information generation means is characterized in that a plurality of types of state control information (control state commands) are generated by a common control (control state command batch setting process) at any of the plurality of timings. ..
According to this feature, the first state control information that can specify the control state that does not change between the first timing and the second timing in one unit of game, and the first timing and the second timing in one unit of game can change. In a configuration in which a second state control information capable of specifying a control state and a plurality of types of state control information including a plurality of types of state control information are transmitted at each of a plurality of timings including the first timing and the second timing in one unit of the game, any timing is used. Since these multiple types of state control information are transmitted by common control, the first control means transmits the state control information while the second control means side grasps the control state of the first control means in detail. The program capacity can be reduced.
Further, when a plurality of control information is continuously generated by the control information generation means, the progress of the main process is delayed during the generation of the plurality of control information or after the generation of the plurality of control information. It is possible to prevent the control information storage area from overflowing due to the generated control information without increasing the number.

In the means 1, the first control means may be a control means for controlling the game, or a control means other than the control of the game, for example, a control means for controlling the effect. Further, the second control means may be any control means that performs some control based on the control information transmitted from the first control means, for example, when the first control means is a control means that controls the game. , The control means that controls the effect based on the control information transmitted from the first control means may be the second control means, and if the first control means is the control means that controls the effect, the first The second control means may be a control means that controls the effect device based on the control information transmitted from the control means.

The gaming machine of the means 2 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the means 1.
The first control means includes an output port (command output port) for outputting the control information (command).
The feature is that the output port (command output port) is initialized during the period from the end of the interrupt process (timer interrupt process (main)) to the next execution of the interrupt process.
According to this feature, since the output port that outputs the control information is initialized during the period when the control information is not output, it is possible to prevent the control information from being specified by an unauthorized board or the like.

The gaming machine of the means 3 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the means 1 or 2.
The first control means includes an output port (command output port) for outputting the control information (command).
When the control information (command) is not transmitted by the control information transmitting means (normal command transmission processing) in the interrupt processing (timer interrupt processing (main)), the output port (command output port) is initialized. It is characterized by being.
According to this feature, in the interrupt process where control information is not output, the output port that outputs control information is initialized to prevent the control information from being specified by an unauthorized board or the like. can.

The gaming machine of the means 4 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to 3.
The first timing is the timing associated with the start of the game (when the operation of the start switch 7 is performed), and the second timing is the timing associated with the end of the game (the operation of the stop switch of the third stop is completed). When) is characterized.
According to this feature, the control state of the first control means can be grasped at the beginning and the end of the game on the second control means side.

The gaming machine of the means 5 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to 4.
The state control information (control state command) can change for each unit of game when the game state is in a specific game state (advantageous state advantageous to the player), while the state control information (control state command) is one unit except for the specific game state. It is characterized by including state control information (AT-related command A) that can specify a control state that does not change for each game.
According to this feature, state control information that can specify a control state that may or may not change depending on the gaming state is also transmitted as these multiple types of state control information under common control. The program capacity when the first control means transmits the state control information can be reduced while grasping the control state of the first control means in detail on the second control means side.

The gaming machine of the means 6 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to 5.
A plurality of types of state control information (control state commands) generated by the state control information generation means at one timing are assigned consecutive numbers (for example, B0 to CF) for each type.
The state control information generation means is characterized in that a plurality of types of state control information (control state commands) are generated in numerical order at one timing.
According to this feature, it is possible for the second control means side to grasp whether the transmission order of the control information is normal.

The gaming machine of the means 7 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to 6.
The state control information generation means is characterized in that when generating a plurality of types of state control information (control state commands), at least a part of the state control information (control state commands) is created by calculation (addition processing). It is supposed to be.
According to this feature, the data capacity for creating the state control information can be reduced.

The gaming machine of the means 8 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to 7.
It is equipped with a variable display unit (reel 2L, 2C, 2R) that can variablely display multiple types of identification information that can be identified by each.
In a gaming machine (slot machine 1) in which a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) and a prize can be generated according to the display result.
Derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated by the player to derive the display result, and
An operation mode notification means (navigation notification, navigation effect) capable of discriminatingly notifying the operation mode (stop order) of the derived operation means, and
Equipped with
The first control means is
Predetermining means (internal lottery) to determine the display result that is allowed to be derived before the display result is derived,
When the determination result of the advance determination means (internal lottery) becomes the notification target result (notification target combination) that is the target of notification (navigation notification), an advantageous operation mode (favorable stop for the player) for the player. The notification state control means for controlling the notification state (the state in which the navigation notification is executed) to notify the notification (in order),
Including
The control information generating means includes a specific control information generating means for generating specific control information (first internal winning command, second internal winning command) regarding a determination result of the prior determination means (internal lottery).
In the specific control information generation means, the determination result of the prior determination means (internal lottery) is the notification target result (notification) regardless of whether or not the notification state (state in which navigation notification is executed) is controlled. Generates the specific control information (second internal winning command) that can specify that the notification target result has been obtained but cannot specify the advantageous operation mode (stop order advantageous to the player) when the target combination is achieved. It is characterized by doing.
According to this feature, in a configuration including a first control means and a second control means, and information regarding a determination result of the prior determination means is specified from the specific control information transmitted from the first control means, the first control means. On the side, the operation procedure notification means controls the notification state in which the advantageous operation procedure advantageous to the player is notified, and the first control means determines the prior determination means regardless of whether or not the notification state is controlled. When the result becomes the notification target result, the specific control information that can specify the notification target result but cannot specify the advantageous operation mode is transmitted to the second control means, so that the first control means side notifies. Regardless of whether or not the state is controlled, the advantageous operation procedure according to the determination result of the prior determination means is not specified from the specific control information, so that the process related to the transmission of the specific control information can be simplified. Even if the second control means side is fraudulent, it is possible to prevent the advantageous operation mode from being notified in a state where the notification state is not controlled.

The gaming machine of the means 9 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to 8.
It is equipped with a variable display unit (reel 2L, 2C, 2R) that can variablely display multiple types of identification information that can be identified by each.
In a gaming machine (slot machine 1) in which a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) and a prize can be generated according to the display result.
Derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated by the player to derive the display result, and
An operation mode notification means (navigation notification, navigation effect) capable of discriminatingly notifying the operation mode (stop order) of the derived operation means, and
Equipped with
The first control means is
Predetermining means (internal lottery) to determine the display result that is allowed to be derived before the display result is derived,
Numerical value setting means for setting different numerical values (winning numbers) for each determination result of the advance determination means (internal lottery), and
A predetermined control means that performs predetermined control (setting of an internal winning flag, navigation notification, command creation, stop control of reels 2L, 2C, 2R, etc.) according to a numerical value (winning number) set by the numerical value setting means.
When the determination result of the advance determination means (internal lottery) becomes the notification target result (notification target combination) that is the target of notification (navigation notification), an advantageous operation mode (favorable stop for the player) for the player. The notification state control means for controlling the notification state (the state in which the navigation notification is executed) to notify the notification (in order),
Including
The control information generating means includes a specific control information generating means for generating specific control information (first internal winning command, second internal winning command) regarding a determination result of the prior determination means (internal lottery).
As the numerical value (winning number) set by the numerical value setting means when the notification target result (notification target combination) is obtained, a continuous numerical value consisting of a predetermined numerical range is assigned.
When the numerical value (winning number) set by the numerical value setting means is within the predetermined numerical range, at least in a state other than the notification state (state in which navigation notification is executed), the specific control information generation means. , The specific control information (second internal winning command) that can specify that the notification target result (notification target combination) has been obtained but cannot specify the advantageous operation mode (stop order advantageous for the player). It is a feature.
According to this feature, in a configuration including a first control means and a second control means, and information regarding a determination result of the prior determination means is specified from the specific control information transmitted from the second control means, the first control means. On the side, the operation procedure notification means controls the notification state in which the advantageous operation procedure advantageous to the player is notified, and in the first control means, the determination result of the prior determination means is the notification target result at least in a state other than the notification state. When this happens, specific control information that can be specified that the notification target result has been obtained but the advantageous operation mode cannot be specified is transmitted to the second control means, so that the first control means controls the notification state. Regardless of whether or not it is present, the advantageous operation procedure according to the determination result of the prior determination means is not specified from the specific control information, so that the notification state is not controlled even if the second control means side is fraudulent. It is possible to prevent the advantageous operation mode from being notified in the state. Further, as a numerical value set by the numerical value setting means when the notification target result is obtained, a continuous numerical value consisting of a predetermined numerical range is assigned, and whether or not the first control means is the notification target result. Can be determined based on whether or not the numerical value used when performing the predetermined control is within the predetermined numerical range assigned to the notification target result, so that the processing when transmitting the specific control information can be simplified.

In the means 8 and 9, the operation mode of the derived operation means is an operation mode of operating at any one of a plurality of different operation timings, an operation mode of operating at any one of a plurality of operation orders, and an operation mode of operating at any one of a plurality of operation orders. The operation mode and the like by the combination of these are applicable.

The gaming machine of the means 10 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to 9.
A data storage means (RAM91c) capable of storing data and
A holding means (backup RAM 61) capable of holding data stored in the data storage means (RAM 91c) even when the power supply is stopped, and a holding means (backup RAM 61).
Equipped with
The data storage means (RAM 91c) includes a first storage area (control state data area) for storing control data (control state data) for control by the second control means (sub control unit 91), and the first. It has a second storage area (command history data area) capable of storing a plurality of control information (commands) received from one control means (main control unit 41).
The control data (control state data) stored in the first storage area (control state data area) and the control information (command history data) stored in the second storage area (command history data area) will be any of them. Even if the power supply is stopped, it is held by the holding means (backup RAM 61).
The second control means (sub control unit 91) is
Control information (command history data) stored in the second storage area (command history data area) when a predetermined output condition (the setting key switch 37 is operated while the front door 1b is open) is satisfied. Control information output means (command history display) that outputs the contents of
Initialization condition determination means for determining whether or not the initialization conditions (data in the backup RAM 61 is not normal and the setting command (start) is received) are satisfied when the power supply is started.
An initialization means that initializes the data held by the holding means (backup RAM 61) when it is determined by the initialization condition determining means that the initialization condition is satisfied.
Including
When it is determined by the initialization condition determining means that the initialization condition is satisfied, the control data (control state data) among the data held by the holding means (backup RAM 61) is obtained by the initialization means. While it is initialized, the control information (command history data) is retained without being initialized.
According to this feature, even when the initialization condition is satisfied and the data held by the holding means is initialized, the control data for the second control means to perform control is initialized. , Since the control information is retained without being initialized, even if the initialization condition is satisfied and the data held by the holding means is initialized, the reception status of the control information before the initialization condition is satisfied. Can be identified.
The holding means may be configured to hold the data itself stored in the data storage means even if the power supply is stopped, or the data is held even if the power supply is stopped separately from the data storage means. The non-volatile storage means may be configured to retain the data stored in the data storage means by storing the data stored in the data storage means.
Further, in contrast to the non-volatile storage means in which the data is retained even if the power supply is stopped separately from the data storage means, the data stored in the data storage means is stored in the data storage means. When the initialization means initializes the data held by the holding means in the case of the configuration in which the data is held, the data stored in the non-volatile storage means is not returned to the data storage means. As long as it is configured, the data itself stored in the non-volatile storage means may or may not be initialized.
Further, the control information output means may be configured to display the contents of the control information stored in the second storage area on a display or the like, may be configured to display a coded image, or may be an external device. It may be configured to output a identifiable signal.

The gaming machine of the means 11 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to 10.
An image display means (liquid crystal display 51) capable of displaying an image and
A display control means (sub control unit 91) that controls the display of the image display means, and
A control data storage means (ROM91b) for storing control data (program for effect control) of the display control means, and a control data storage means (ROM91b).
Image data storage means (CGROM99a to c) for storing image data (information display data) of an image to be displayed on the image display means (liquid crystal display 51), and
Equipped with
The display control means is
Inspection means (simple check, detailed check) for inspecting the stored contents of the image data storage means (CGROM99a to c), and
An inspection result display control means for displaying the inspection result by the inspection means on the image display means (liquid crystal display 51), and
Including
The control data storage means (ROM91b) stores image data (information display data) of images constituting the inspection results (simple check screen, detailed check screen) by the inspection means.
The inspection result display control means uses the image data (information display data) stored in the control data storage means (ROM91b) and the inspection result (simple check screen, detailed check) by the inspection means (simple check, detailed check). The detailed check screen) is displayed on the image display means (liquid crystal display 51).
According to this feature, when displaying the inspection result of the inspection means for inspecting the stored contents of the image data storage means on the image display means, the control data storage means is used instead of the image data stored in the image data storage means. Since the inspection result by the inspection means is displayed on the image display means using the stored image data, the inspection result is normally displayed even if the image data stored in the image data storage means is abnormal. It can be displayed.
The display control means may be composed of one control means or a plurality of control means.
Further, the inspection of the stored contents of the image data storage means by the inspection means may be any inspection as long as it is possible to determine whether or not the stored contents of the image data storage means are normal. By outputting the calculation result calculated by a predetermined calculation from the specific data stored or the image data stored in the image data storage means, whether or not the output specific data or the calculation result is normal is determined. The configuration may be such that it can be determined, or the calculation result calculated by a predetermined calculation from the specific data stored in the image data storage means or the image data stored in the image data storage means is a specific value. It may be a configuration in which it is possible to determine whether or not it is normal depending on whether or not it is normal, or a predetermined data from specific data stored in the image data storage means or image data stored in the image data storage means. The configuration may be such that it is possible to determine whether or not the calculation result calculated by the calculation is normal depending on whether or not it matches a specific value stored in another storage means.
Further, the image data of the image constituting the inspection result by the inspection means corresponds to, for example, image data when displaying the inspection result as an image, font data when displaying the inspection result as characters, symbols, or the like.

The present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, and has a configuration other than the invention-specific matters together with the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may be a thing.

It is a front view of the slot machine of the Example to which this invention was applied. It is a perspective view which shows the internal structure of a slot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement of a reel. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a slot machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a main control part. It is a figure which shows the memory map of ROM and RAM mounted on the main control part. It is a figure which shows the detail of the memory map of the ROM and RAM mounted on the main control unit. It is a figure which shows the structure of the game program and the non-game program. It is a figure which shows the relationship between a game area and a non-game area. (A) is a flowchart showing the flow of the process when calling the non-game program from the process based on the game program during the execution of the main process, and (b) is based on the game program during the execution of the timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process at the time of calling a non-game program from a process. It is a figure which shows the area of the RAM which the main control part initializes when the 1st condition and the 2nd condition are satisfied. It is a figure for demonstrating the control state command which the main control unit 41 sends to the sub control unit 91. It is a flow diagram which shows the control content of the transmission command setting process at the start of a game executed by the main control unit 41. It is a flow diagram which shows the control content of the control state command batch setting process executed by the main control unit 41. It is a flow diagram which shows the control content of the command setting process executed by the main control unit 41. It is a flow diagram which shows the control content of the transmission command setting process at the end of a game executed by the main control unit 41. It is a flow diagram which shows the control content of the timer interrupt process (main) executed by the main control unit 41. It is a figure for demonstrating the kind of the error notification effect executed by a sub-control unit. It is a figure which shows the execution mode of the error notification effect which a sub-control unit executes. It is a figure which shows the execution mode of the notification effect during setting change which a sub-control unit executes. It is a figure which shows the execution mode of the standby effect which a sub-control unit executes. It is a figure which shows the structure of the apparatus related to the CGROM check executed by the sub-control unit. It is a figure for demonstrating the collation data stored in ROM and CGROM of a sub-control unit. It is a figure for demonstrating the check screen which is displayed when the sub-control unit performs the simple check of CGROM. It is a figure for demonstrating the check screen which is displayed when the sub-control unit performs the detailed check of CGROM. It is a figure for demonstrating the control content of the simple check of CGROM executed by the sub-control unit. It is a figure for demonstrating the control content of the detailed check of a CGROM executed by a sub-control unit. It is a figure for demonstrating the control content of the inspection display control executed by a sub-control unit. It is a figure for demonstrating the data area included in the RAM of a sub-control unit. It is a flow diagram which shows the control content of the start processing (sub) executed by a sub-control unit. It is a flow diagram which shows the control content of the command history recording process executed by a sub-control unit. It is a flow diagram which shows the control content of the error history recording process executed by a sub-control unit. It is a figure explaining the type of the error and the like which the sub-control unit displays in the detailed history display and the simple history display in the history display control. In the figure explaining the display position when the sub-control unit displays the error history etc. on the liquid crystal display in the error history display control when the first history display condition is satisfied, and the history display selection screen in the error history display control. be. It is a figure explaining the simple history display screen in error history display control. It is a figure explaining the detailed history display screen in error history display control. It is a figure explaining the command history display screen in error history display control. It is a figure explaining the history display selection screen and the simple history display screen which the sub-control unit displays in the error history display control when the second history display condition is satisfied.

An embodiment for carrying out the slot machine according to the present invention will be described below based on examples.

An embodiment of the slot machine to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to the drawings. As shown in FIG. 1, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a housing 1a having an open front surface and a side of the housing 1a. It is composed of a front door 1b rotatably supported at the end.

As shown in FIG. 2, inside the housing 1a of the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, reels 2L, 2C, and 2R (hereinafter, left reel, middle reel, and right reel) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer periphery are arranged. ) Are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction, and as shown in FIG. 1, three consecutive symbols among the symbols arranged on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R can be seen from the see-through window 3 provided on the front door 1b. It is arranged like this.

As shown in FIG. 3, "red 7", "blue 7", "white 7", "BAR", "watermelon", "cherry a", and "cherry" are placed on the outer peripheral portions of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, respectively. Twenty-one each of a plurality of mutually distinguishable symbols such as "b", "bell", "replay a", "replay b", and "plum" are drawn in a predetermined order. The patterns drawn on the outer peripheral portions of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three stages in the see-through window 3 provided in the substantially center of the front door 1b.

Each reel 2L, 2C, 2R is rotated by the corresponding reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R (see FIG. 4), so that the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are continuous with the see-through window 3. While the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped rotating, three consecutive symbols are derived and displayed on the perspective window 3 as a display result.

Inside the reels 2L, 2C and 2R, there are reel sensors 33L, 33C and 33R that detect the reference position for each of the reels 2L, 2C and 2R, and a reel LED 55 that illuminates the reels 2L, 2C and 2R from the back. , Are provided. Further, the reel LED 55 is composed of 12 LEDs corresponding to three consecutive symbols of reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and each symbol can be independently irradiated.

A display area 51a of the liquid crystal display 51 (see FIG. 1) is arranged at a position on the front side (player side) of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R of the front door 1b. The liquid crystal display 51 has a liquid crystal panel having transparency in a state where no voltage is applied to the liquid crystal element, and is via the transmission region 51b and the perspective window 3 corresponding to the perspective window 3 of the display region 51a. The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R can be visually recognized from the player side.

As shown in FIG. 1, the front door 1b has a medal insertion unit 4 into which medals can be inserted, a medal payout exit 9 from which medals are paid out, and credits (the number of medals stored as a player-owned game value). MAXBET switch 6 operated when setting the maximum number of bets among the specified number of bets determined according to the gaming state within the range, setting of medals and bets stored as credits. Settlement switch 10 operated when paying for the medals used for (returning the medals used for setting credits and bets), start switch 7 operated when starting the game, reels 2L, 2C The stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, which are operated when the rotation of the 2Rs is stopped, and the effect switch 56 used for the effect are provided so as to be operable by the player.

In this embodiment, of the three reels 2L, 2C, and 2R that have started to rotate, the reel that stops first is referred to as a first stop reel, and the stop thereof is referred to as a first stop. Similarly, the reel that stops second is referred to as the second stop reel, the stop is referred to as the second stop, the reel that stops third is referred to as the third stop reel, and the stop is referred to as the third stop. Alternatively, it is called a final stop.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the front door 1b shows a credit display 11 that displays the number of medals stored as credits, the number of medals paid out due to the occurrence of a prize, and the contents when an error occurs. A game auxiliary display 12 that displays an error code, information that can identify the reel stop order by the navigation notification described later, 1 BETLED 14 that notifies by lighting that the bet number is set to 1, and 2 bets are set. 2BETLED15 that notifies by lighting that the game is being inserted, 3BETLED16 that notifies by lighting that the number of bets is set to 3, a insertion request LED17 that notifies by lighting that a medal can be inserted, and a game by operating the start switch 7. A start enabled LED18 that notifies by lighting that the start operation is valid, and a lighting that notifies that the wait (a state of waiting for the start of rotation of the reel because a certain period of time has not passed since the previous game start) is in progress. A game display unit 13 is provided with a weighting LED 19 and a replaying LED 20 for notifying by lighting that the replay game is in progress.

Inside the MAXBET switch 6, a BET switch effective LED21 (see FIG. 4) for notifying by lighting that the setting operation of the bet number by the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is effective is provided, and the stop switches 8L, 8C, Inside the 8R, left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R (see FIG. 4) are provided to notify by lighting that the reel stop operation by the corresponding stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is effective. Inside the effect switch 56, an effect LED 56a (see FIG. 4) is provided to notify by lighting that the operation of the effect switch 56 is effective.

Inside the front door 1b, as shown in FIG. 2, a reset switch 23 for detecting an error state described later and a reset operation for canceling a stop state described later by a predetermined key operation, and a change of a setting value described later. A setting value display 24 that displays the setting value at that time while checking the middle or setting value, and a hit that controls the stop state (the state in which the progress of the game is restricted until the reset operation is performed) at a predetermined trigger. Stop switch 36a for selecting the enable / disable of the stop function, automatic control for automatic settlement processing (processing to settle (return) medals stored as credits regardless of the player's operation) at a predetermined trigger The automatic settlement switch 36b for selecting the enable / disable of the settlement function and the flow path of the medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 are provided on the side of the hopper tank 34a (see FIG. 2) described later provided inside the housing 1a. Alternatively, a flow path switching solenoid 30 for selectively switching to either one of the medal payout outlet 9 side, a medal insertion unit 31 for detecting medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 and flowing down to the hopper tank 34a side, and an insertion medal sensor. A medal selector 29 having a slot sensor 26 for detecting the insertion of foreign matter on the upstream side of 31 and a door open detection switch 25 (see FIG. 4) for detecting the open state of the front door 1b are provided.

As shown in FIG. 2, inside the housing 1a, the reel reference positions of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R (see FIG. 4), and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R described above are respectively. Reel unit 2 composed of detectable reel sensors 33L, 33C, 33R (see FIG. 4), external output board 1000 for outputting an external output signal (see FIG. 4), and medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 are stored. The hopper tank 34a, the hopper motor 34b for paying out the medals stored in the hopper tank 34a from the medal payout outlet 9 (see FIG. 4), and the payout sensor 34c for detecting the medal paid out by driving the hopper motor 34b (see FIG. 4). A hopper unit 34 and a power supply box 100 including (see FIG. 4) are provided.

An overflow tank 35 for storing medals overflowing from the hopper tank 34a is provided on the side of the hopper unit 34. Inside the overflow tank 35, a full tank sensor 35a (see FIG. 4) for detecting that the stored medals are full is provided.

As shown in FIG. 2, the front surface of the power supply box 100 functions as a setting key switch 37 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, and a reset switch for canceling an error state or a stop state in normal times. However, in the setting change state, the reset / setting switch 38 that functions as a setting switch for changing the setting value of the winning probability (ball output rate) of the internal lottery, which will be described later, and the power supply that is operated when the power is turned on / off. A switch 39 is provided.

Since the power supply box 100 is provided inside the housing 1a and the front door 1b is configured to be openable by a predetermined key operation possessed by a store clerk or the like, it is provided on the front surface of these power supply boxes 100. The setting key switch 37, the reset / setting switch 38, and the power switch 39 can be operated only by a store clerk or the like who possesses the key, and cannot be operated by the player. The same applies to the reset switch 23 detected by a predetermined key operation. In particular, since the setting key switch 37 requires further key operation after opening the front door 1b by key operation, only the clerk who has the key to operate the setting key switch 37 among the clerk of the amusement park. Operation is possible.

When playing a game on the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, first, a medal is inserted from the medal insertion unit 4, or a bet number is set using credits. To use the credit, operate the MAXBET switch 6. When the specified number of bets determined according to the game state is set, the winning line LN (see FIG. 1) becomes valid, and the operation of the start switch 7 is valid, that is, the game can be started. Become. If more than the maximum number of medals are inserted out of the specified number corresponding to the gaming state, the amount will be added to the credit.

The winning line is a line set to determine whether the combination of symbols displayed on the see-through windows 3 of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is a combination of winning symbols. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, only the winning line LN set across the symbols arranged horizontally in the middle stage of the reel 2L, the middle stage of the reel 2C, and the middle stage of the reel 2R, that is, the middle stage, wins a prize. It is defined as a line. In this embodiment, only one winning line is applied, but a plurality of winning lines may be applied.

Further, in this embodiment, in order to make it easy to recognize that the winning line LN has a combination of symbols constituting the winning, the invalid lines LM1 to 4 are set separately from the winning line LN. The invalid lines LM1 to 4 are not determined by the combination of the symbols aligned with the invalid lines LM1 to 4, but are invalid lines when the winning line LN has a combination of symbols constituting a specific winning. By configuring the combination of symbols that will be awarded when the winning line LN is aligned with any of LM1 to 4 (for example, bell-bell-bell), the symbols constituting the winning line LN are the symbols that constitute a specific winning. It makes it easy to recognize that the combinations are complete.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the invalid line LM1 and the reel 2L are set across the symbols arranged horizontally in the upper stage of the reel 2L, the upper stage of the reel 2C, and the upper stage of the reel 2R, that is, the upper stage. The lower tier, the lower tier of the reel 2C, the lower tier of the reel 2R, that is, the invalid line LM2 set across the symbols arranged horizontally in the lower tier, the upper tier of the reel 2L, the middle tier of the reel 2C, the lower tier of the reel 2R, that is. Invalid line set across symbols lined up to the right LM3, lower row of reel 2L, middle row of reel 2C, upper row of reel 2R, that is, invalid line set across symbols lined up to the right Four types of LM4 are defined as invalid line LM.

Further, in this embodiment, as a winning combination, a prize is awarded when a predetermined combination of symbols defined as a winning combination (for example, "Bell-watermelon-cherry b") is prepared in the winning line LN, and a predetermined symbol is obtained. By aligning the combinations, any of the invalid lines LM1 to LM4 has a symbol combination (for example, "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon") that is an index that is easier to recognize than a predetermined symbol combination, and thus the invalid lines LM1 to LM4. Includes roles that can be made to look like a prize by combining the symbols aligned with any of the above. In the following, a combination of symbols aligned with any of the invalid lines LM1 to LM4 when a predetermined combination of symbols is aligned with the winning line LN is referred to as a symbol combination as an index, and constitutes a combination of symbols as an index. The symbol is called an index symbol.

When the start switch 7 is operated while the game can be started, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate, and the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R change continuously. When any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is operated in this state, the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped, and the display result is derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3.

When all reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped, one game ends, and a predetermined combination of symbols (hereinafter, also referred to as a combination) on the winning line LN is displayed for each reel 2L, 2C, and 2R. If the game is stopped as a result, a prize will be awarded, and a number of medals determined according to the prize will be given to the player and added to the credit. Further, when the credit reaches the upper limit (50 in this embodiment), the medal is directly paid out from the medal payout exit 9 (see FIG. 1). Further, when the combination of symbols accompanied by the transition of the gaming state stops on the winning line LN as a display result of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R, the combination of symbols is shifted to the gaming state according to the combination of symbols. ..

In this embodiment, the game starts when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected while the operation of the start switch 7 is valid, and the game ends when all the reels are stopped. In addition, one unit of control for executing the game (game control) starts when all the controls associated with the end of the previous game are completed, and when all the controls associated with the end of the game are completed. finish.

Further, in this embodiment, a configuration using three reels is illustrated, but a configuration using only one reel, a configuration using two reels, and a configuration using four or more reels may be used. In the configuration using two or more reels, the winning configuration may be determined based on the combination of the display results derived to all the two or more reels. Further, in this embodiment, the variable display device is configured by a physical reel, but the variable display device may be configured by an image display device such as a liquid crystal display.

Further, in the slot machine 1 in the present embodiment, after the game is started and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated to start the fluctuation of the symbol, one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is operated. When this is done, the rotation of the reels corresponding to the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is stopped and the symbol is stopped and displayed. The maximum stop delay time from the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R to the stop of the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is 190 ms (milliseconds).

The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate 80 times per minute and change the symbol for 80 x 21 (number of symbol frames per reel) = 1680 frames, so that a maximum of 4 symbols can be drawn in 190 ms. You will be able to do it. That is, the symbols that can be selected as the stop symbols are the symbols displayed when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated, and the symbols up to 4 frames ahead of the stop switches, for a total of 5 frames.

Therefore, for example, when any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is operated, when the symbol displayed at the bottom of the reel corresponding to the stop switch is used as a reference, the symbol is up to 4 frames ahead. Since the symbol can be displayed in the lower row, the symbol displayed in the middle row of the reel corresponding to the stop switch when any of the stop switches 8L and 8R is operated in each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. Designs arranged within 5 frames including the above can be displayed on the winning line.

In the following, reels 2L, 2C, and 2R may be simply referred to as reels when it is not necessary to distinguish them. Further, the reel 2L may be referred to as a left reel, the reel 2C may be referred to as a middle reel, and the reel 2R may be referred to as a right reel. Further, the operation of stopping the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R by operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R may be referred to as a stop operation.

FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the slot machine 1. As shown in FIG. 4, the slot machine 1 is provided with a game control board 40, an effect control board 90, and a power supply board 101. The game control board 40 controls the game state, and the effect control board 90 controls the game state. The effect is controlled according to the above, and the drive power supply for the electric components constituting the slot machine 1 is generated by the power supply board 101 and supplied to each part.

An AC100V power supply is supplied to the power supply board 101 from the outside, and a DC voltage necessary for driving the electric components constituting the slot machine 1 is generated from the AC100V power supply, and the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 are generated. It is designed to be supplied to. Further, the above-mentioned hopper motor 34b, payout sensor 34c, full tank sensor 35a, setting key switch 37, reset / setting switch 38, and power switch 39 are connected to the power supply board 101.

The game control board 40 includes the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R, the settlement switch 10, the reset switch 23, the stop switch 36a, the automatic settlement switch 36b, the input medal sensor 31, and the door open. The detection switch 25, the reel sensors 33L, 33C, 33R are connected, and the payout sensor 34c, the full tank sensor 35a, the setting key switch 37, and the reset / setting switch 38 described above are connected via the power supply board 101. The detection signals of these connected switches are input. Further, on the game control board 40, the above-mentioned credit display 11, game auxiliary display 12, 1-3 BETLED 14 to 16, input request LED 17, start effective LED 18, wait LED 19, replay LED 20, BET switch effective LED 21, left. , Middle, right stop effective LED 22L, 22C, 22R, set value display 24, flow path switching solenoid 30, reel motor 32L, 32C, 32R are connected, and the above-mentioned hopper motor 34b is connected via the power supply board 101. These electric components are connected and are driven based on the control of the main control unit 41 described later mounted on the game control board 40.

The game control board 40 has a main control unit 41 that performs processing related to the progress of the game and directly or indirectly controls each part of the control circuit mounted on the game control board 40, and a control that becomes an oscillation signal of a predetermined frequency. A control clock generation circuit 42 that generates a clock CCLK, a random clock generation circuit 43 that generates a random clock RCLK that is an oscillation signal having a predetermined frequency different from the oscillation frequency of the control clock CCLK, and a game control board 40. The switch detection circuit 44 that takes in the detection signal input from the switches connected directly to or via the power supply board 101 and transmits it to the main control unit 41, and the motor drive signal (stepping motor) output from the main control unit 41. The motor drive circuit 45 that transmits the phase signal) to the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R, the solenoid drive circuit 46 that transmits the solenoid drive signal output from the main control unit 41 to the flow path switching solenoid 30, and the main control unit. The LED drive circuit 47 that transmits the LED drive signal output from 41 to various indicators and LEDs connected to the game control board 40 and the voltage of the power supply supplied to the slot machine 1 are monitored to detect a decrease in voltage. When this happens, the power failure detection circuit 48 outputs a voltage drop signal to that effect to the main control unit 41, and the main control unit 41 is in a state where the power supply is unstable, such as when the power is turned on or when the power is cut off. It is equipped with a reset circuit 49 that gives a system reset signal.

FIG. 5 shows a configuration example of the main control unit 41 mounted on the game control board 40. The main control unit 41 is a one-chip microcomputer, and includes an external bus interface 501, a clock circuit 502, a collation block 503, a unique information storage circuit 504, an arithmetic circuit 505, a reset / interrupt controller 506, and the like. CPU (Central Processing Unit) 41a, ROM (Read Only Memory) 41b, RAM (Random Access Memory) 41c, free run counter circuit 507, random number circuits 508a, 508b, timer circuit 509, and interrupt controller 510. , A parallel input port 511, a serial communication circuit 512, a parallel output port 513, and an address decoding circuit 514.

The reset / interrupt controller 506 is for controlling various resets and interrupt requests that occur inside or outside the main control unit 41. The reset / interrupt controller 506 includes an out-of-designated area travel prohibition (IAT) circuit 506a and a watchdog timer (WDT) 506b. The IAT circuit 506a is a circuit that monitors whether or not the user program is correctly executed in the designated area, and has a function of outputting an IAT generation signal when it is detected that the user program is executed outside the designated area. Further, the watchdog timer 506b has a function of generating a time-out signal for each set period.

The external bus interface 501 is a bus interface having an interface function between the external bus and the internal bus of the chip constituting the main control unit 41, an address bus, a data bus, and a direction control function for each control signal. The clock circuit 502 is a circuit that generates an internal system clock SCLK by dividing the control clock CCLK by two or the like. The collation block 503 has a function of connecting to an external collation machine and collating chips. The unique information storage circuit 504 is a circuit that stores a plurality of types of unique information that is internal information of the main control unit 41. The arithmetic circuit 505 is a circuit that performs multiplication and division.

The CPU 41a is a control CPU that executes game control in the slot machine 1 by executing a user program (game control processing program for game control) based on the control code read from the ROM 41b. When such game control is executed, a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 41a reads fixed data from the ROM 41b, a variable data writing operation in which the CPU 41a writes various variable data to the RAM 41c and temporarily stores them, and a CPU 41a are temporarily stored in the RAM 41c. Variable data read operation to read various variable data, CPU 41a receives input of various signals from the outside of the main control unit 41 via the external bus interface 501, parallel input port 511, serial communication circuit 512, etc., CPU 41a Also performs transmission operations such as outputting various signals to the outside of the main control unit 41 via the external bus interface 501, the serial communication circuit 512, the parallel output port 513, and the like.

The ROM 41b stores a control code indicating a user program (game control processing program for game control), fixed data, and the like. The RAM 41c provides a work area or the like for game control. Here, at least a part of the RAM 41c may be a backup RAM backed up by a backup power supply. That is, even if the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped, at least a part of the contents of the RAM 41c is stored for a predetermined period.

An 8-bit free run counter is mounted as the free run counter circuit 507. The random number circuits 508a and 508b are circuits that generate numerical data such as 8-bit random numbers and 16-bit random numbers, which are random number values having a predetermined update range. In this embodiment, the hardware random number generated by the 16-bit random number circuit 508b out of the random number circuits 508a and 508b is used as a random number for internal lottery described later. The timer circuit 509 is a 16-bit programmable timer, which counts down the set timer value based on the input of the control clock CCLK, and outputs an interrupt request signal to the interrupt controller when it reaches 0000H. In this embodiment, it is possible to perform periodic interrupt request and time measurement by using the timer circuit 509.

The interrupt controller 510 is a circuit that controls an external interrupt request from the interrupt terminal and an interrupt request from a built-in peripheral circuit (for example, serial communication circuit 512, random number circuits 508a, 508b, timer circuit 509). .. The parallel input port 511 has a built-in 8-bit wide input-only port. Further, the parallel output port 513 included in the main control unit 41 shown in FIG. 4 has a built-in port dedicated to output with an 11-bit width. The serial communication circuit 512 is a circuit that performs asynchronous serial communication in input / output to the outside.

The address decoding circuit 514 is a circuit for decoding each functional block inside the main control unit 41 and decoding a chip select signal which is a decoding signal for an external device. The chip select signal enables the internal circuit of the main control unit 41 or an external device as a peripheral device to be selectively and effectively operated to be accessed from the CPU 41a.

For example, when the main control unit 41 has an access to an area of the storage area of the ROM 41b in which a program or the like is not stored, or when there is an access to an area of the storage area of the RAM 41c for which access prohibition is set. That is, by generating an illegal access reset when there is an access to a memory area that is not accessed in normal operation, the progress of the game is disabled, and the unused area and operation of ROM 41b are disabled. Even when an illegal program is stored in an area unrelated to the above, an unused area of the RAM 41c, or the like, it is possible to prevent the illegal program from being executed.

Further, the main control unit 41 is started when an internal or external reset occurs. At this time, the value set in the vector table assigned to the ROM 41b and where the start address of the interrupt process is set. However, it is judged whether it is a value indicating unused or a value indicating the area where the program etc. is actually stored, and if it is neither of the values, it is not started, and the interrupt is interrupted. It is possible to prevent in advance that an unintended process is executed due to an occurrence or the like.

The main control unit 41 transmits various commands to the sub control unit 91 via the parallel output port 513 (hereinafter, the output port that outputs the command among the parallel output ports 513 may be referred to as a command output port). The command transmitted from the main control unit 41 to the sub control unit 91 is sent in only one direction, and the command is not sent from the sub control unit 91 to the main control unit 41. Further, in this embodiment, the command is transmitted to the sub control unit 91 via the parallel output port 513, that is, the command is transmitted as a parallel signal, but the command is transmitted via the serial communication circuit 512. A configuration in which a command is transmitted to the sub control unit 91, that is, a configuration in which the command is transmitted by a serial signal may be used.

Further, the main control unit 41 inputs the detection status of various switches connected to the game control board 40 from the parallel input port 511. Then, the main control unit 41 executes a main process of gradually shifting according to the detection state of various switches input from the parallel input port 511. Further, the main control unit 41 can interrupt the main process and execute the interrupt process due to the occurrence of the interrupt. In this embodiment, the timer interrupt process (main) is executed at regular time intervals (about 0.56 ms in this embodiment) when a timeout occurs in the timer circuit 509. Further, the main control unit 41 is set to automatically prohibit other interrupts during the execution of the interrupt process, and when a plurality of interrupts occur at the same time, the order is predetermined. The interrupt to be executed with priority is set. If another interrupt factor occurs during the execution of the interrupt process and the interrupt factor continues even after the interrupt process is completed, the interrupt process is completed. The ban will be automatically lifted, at which point a new interrupt will occur. In addition, it is set to automatically prohibit other interrupts during the execution of the interrupt process, and the interrupt prohibition is not automatically canceled when the interrupt process is completed, but the interrupt process is performed. Other interrupts may be prohibited by the program at the start, and the interrupt prohibition may be canceled by the program at the end of the interrupt process.

The main control unit 41 repeatedly loops the processing according to the control state until the detection state of the various switches connected to the game control board 40 changes as the main processing, and responds to the change in the detection state of the various switches. Execute the process of migrating in stages. Further, the main control unit 41 executes a timer interrupt process (main) at regular time intervals (about 0.56 ms in this embodiment). The execution interval of the timer interrupt process (main) is set to be longer than the total time of the time in which the process repeated according to the control state in the main process completes and the execution time of the timer interrupt process (main). Therefore, the process of repeating according to the control state always completes at least one cycle between this time and the next timer interrupt process (main).

An effect switch 56 and a standby effect switch 57 are connected to the effect control board 90, and detection signals of the effect switch 56 and the standby effect switch 57 are input. Further, an effect device such as a liquid crystal display 51, an effect effect LEDs 52a to c, speakers 53, 54, and a reel LED 55 is connected, and these effect devices are provided by a sub-control unit 91 described later mounted on the effect control board 90. It is driven based on control.

In this embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90 controls the output of the effect devices such as the liquid crystal display 51, the effect effects LEDs 52a to c, the speakers 53, 54, and the reel LED 55. However, apart from the sub control unit 91, an output control unit that directly controls the output of the effect device is mounted on the effect control board 90 or another board, and the sub control unit 91 receives a command from the main control unit 41. The output pattern of the effect device may be determined based on the output pattern, and the output control unit may control the output of the effect device based on the output pattern determined by the sub control unit 91. In such a configuration, the sub control unit 91 and The output control of the effect device is performed by both of the output control units. Further, in this embodiment, the liquid crystal display 51, the effect effects LEDs 52a to c, the speakers 53, 54, and the reel LED 55 are exemplified as the effect device, but the effect device is not limited to these, and is, for example, mechanically driven. A display device or a mechanically driven winning combination may be applied as a directing device.

Further, the effect control board 90 is equipped with CGROMs 99a to c in which image data for effect to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 when the sub control unit 91 executes the effect using the liquid crystal display 51 is stored. The CGROM board 99 is connected, and the display control circuit 92 can refer to the image data and the like stored in the CGROMs 99a to c. Further, an effect LED 59 is mounted on the effect control board 90, and the sub-control unit 91 controls the lighting in a predetermined lighting mode during the execution of the inspection of the CGROMs 99a to c, which will be described later. Further, the effect control board 90 is equipped with a power supply LED 60 connected to a power source that supplies electric power to the sub control unit 91 and the like, and the power source LED 60 is lit when power is supplied to the effect control board 90. It is designed to do.

The effect control board 90 is composed of a microcomputer provided with a sub CPU 91a, ROM 91b, RAM 91c, and I / O port 91d to control the effect, and a liquid crystal display 51 connected to the effect control board 90. Display control circuits 92 that control the display of the above, effect LEDs 52a to c, LED drive circuits 93a to e that control the drive of the reel LED 55, and audio output circuits 94 that control the audio output from the speakers 53 and 54. A reset circuit 95 that gives a reset signal to the sub CPU 91a when the power is turned on or an initialization command from the sub CPU 91a is not input for a certain period of time, and a switch that detects the detection signal input from the switches connected to the effect control board 90. The detection circuit 96, the clock device 97 that outputs time information including date information and time information, and the power supply voltage supplied to the slot machine 1 are monitored, and when a voltage drop is detected, a voltage drop signal to that effect is indicated. Is mounted on a power failure detection circuit 98 that outputs the voltage to the sub CPU 91a, and other circuits and the like.

The effect LED 52a to c are arranged on the front door 1b, and are composed of a plurality of LEDs (not shown) whose light emission can be visually recognized from the player side. The effect LED 52a mainly displays a liquid crystal display on the front door 1b. The LED group arranged in the upper part of the vessel 51, the effect LED 52b is an LED group mainly arranged in the left and right parts of the liquid crystal display 51 in the front door 1b, and the effect LED 52c is mainly in the front. It is a group of LEDs arranged on the panel 200 part where the title of the slot machine 1 and the dividend table are printed on the door 1b.

The sub CPU 91a receives a command transmitted from the game control board 40, performs various controls for performing an effect according to a program for effect control stored in the ROM 91b, and is mounted on the effect control board 90. Directly or indirectly control each part of the control circuit.

In the game control board 40, the reset circuit 95 is set to have a lower voltage for releasing the reset signal than the reset circuit 49 that gives the system reset signal to the main control unit 41, and the sub control unit 91 is set to the main control when the power is turned on. It is designed to start at an earlier stage than the unit 41. On the other hand, the power failure detection circuit 98 is set to have a lower voltage for outputting the voltage drop signal than the power failure detection circuit 48 for outputting the voltage drop signal to the main control unit 41 in the game control board 40. The sub control unit 91 detects a power failure at a stage later than that of the main control unit 41, and performs a power cut process (sub) described later.

Further, the standby effect switch 57 is arranged inside the front door 1b, and the standby effect executed by the sub control unit 91 when the main control unit 41 is controlled to the standby state is used as a normal demo effect. It is a switch that allows you to select whether to use a power saving mode that consumes less power than the demo effect, and by operating the switch by a store clerk, etc., it corresponds to either the demo effect or the power saving mode. The signal is input to the effect control board 90.

Like the main control unit 41, the sub control unit 91 has an interrupt function, generates an interrupt when receiving a command from the main control unit 41, and acquires a command transmitted from the main control unit 41. , Executes command reception interrupt processing to be stored in the buffer. Further, the sub control unit 91 generates an interrupt every time the number of input of the system clock reaches a certain number, that is, every fixed time interval (about 2 ms), and executes the timer interrupt process (sub) described later. Further, unlike the main control unit 41, the sub control unit 91 interrupts the interrupt process (sub) even during the execution of the timer interrupt process (sub) when an interrupt occurs based on the reception of a command. The command reception interrupt process is executed at the same time, and even if the interrupt that triggers the timer interrupt process (sub) occurs at the same time, the command reception interrupt process is executed with the highest priority.

The effect control board 90 is equipped with a backup RAM 61 that can be read and written by the sub control unit 91 and can back up the data of the RAM 91c, and a backup battery 62 that can supply power to the backup RAM 61. There is. When the power is supplied to the slot machine 1, the backup RAM 61 can hold data in the storage area and read and write data by the sub-control unit 91 by supplying power from the power supply board 101. On the other hand, when the voltage supplied from the power supply board 101 drops or when the power is not supplied to the slot machine 1, the power is supplied from the backup battery 62 to retain the data in the storage area and sub. Data can be read and written by the control unit 91. Since the power of the backup RAM 61 is backed up by the backup battery 62 mounted on the effect control board 90, the data in the storage area of the backup RAM 61 is retained as long as the power is continuously supplied by the backup battery 62. It is possible to do. Further, since the backup RAM 61 and the backup battery 62 are both mounted on the effect control board 90, the backup RAM 61 is as long as the power is continuously supplied by the backup battery 62 even when the effect control board 90 is removed from the slot machine 1. It is possible to retain the data in the storage area of.

Further, the effect control board 90 is provided with a battery holder (not shown) capable of detachably locking and holding the backup battery 62, and the backup battery 62 is held in the battery holder. Further, the effect control board 90 is installed inside the slot machine 1 in a state of being housed in a board case (not shown), so that the effect control board 90 is not illegally touched. .. Further, in the board case, the effect control board 90 is housed in the board case (not shown), and the battery is placed at a position corresponding to the position of the exposed battery holder (not shown) placed on the effect control board 90. A protruding portion (not shown) that protrudes toward the holder is provided. The protruding portion is formed so that the tip end portion of the protruding portion and the upper surface of the backup battery 62 held in the battery holder are in contact with each other while the effect control board 90 is housed in the board case. When the tip of the protruding portion comes into contact with the backup battery 62, the backup battery 62 is restricted from moving, and the backup battery 62 is detached from the battery holder due to the influence of vibration applied to the slot machine 1 or the like. Is designed to be prevented.

In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, the payout rate of medals changes according to the set value. More specifically, the medal payout rate is changed by using the winning probability according to the set value in the lottery that affects the advantage to the player such as the internal lottery, the navigation stock lottery, and the additional lottery, which will be described later. The set value is composed of 6 stages of 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is.

In order to change the set value, it is necessary to turn on the power of the slot machine 1 after turning on the setting key switch 37. When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 37 turned on, the setting value read from the RAM 41c is displayed as a display value on the setting value display 24, and the setting value can be changed by operating the reset / setting switch 38. Move to the changed state. When the reset / setting switch 38 is operated in the setting change state, the display value displayed on the setting value display 24 is updated by 1 (when the setting value 6 is further operated, the setting value is changed to 1). Return). Then, when the start switch 7 is operated, the display value is fixed as the set value. Then, when the setting key switch 37 is turned off, the confirmed display value (setting value) is stored in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41, and the game shifts to a state in which the game can proceed.

It should be noted that when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 37 turned on, the setting transition state may be made on condition that the door opening detection switch 25 detects the opening of the front door 1b. Well, with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the setting from being illegally changed when the front door 1b is not opened. Further, in the configuration of shifting to the setting change state on condition that the detection corresponding to the opening of the front door 1b is performed, the door opening detection switch 25 corresponds to the opening of the front door 1b after shifting to the setting change state. It is preferable to maintain the setting change state even if the setting change state is not detected. Therefore, even if the front door 1b is temporarily closed during the setting change, the operation for shifting to the setting change state again is performed. It is not necessary and the setting change operation is not complicated. Further, when the setting key switch 37 is turned off after the start switch 7 is operated to confirm the set value after shifting to the setting change state, the door open detection switch 25 detects the front door 1b to be opened. It may be configured to end the setting change state and shift to a state in which the game can proceed on the condition that the setting has been changed. Even in such a configuration, the front door 1b is illegally not opened. It is possible to prevent the settings from being changed.

Further, in order to confirm the set value, the setting key switch 37 may be turned on after the game is over and the bet number is not set. When the setting key switch 37 is turned on in such a situation, the setting value displayed by the setting value display 24 displays the setting value read from the RAM 41c, and the setting shifts to the setting confirmation state in which the setting value can be confirmed. In the setting confirmation state, the progress of the game is impossible, and by turning off the setting key switch 37, the setting confirmation state ends and the game returns to the state where the progress is possible.

After the game is over, when the setting key switch 37 is turned on while the bet number is not set, it is a condition that the door opening detection switch 25 detects the opening of the front door 1b. In addition, it may be configured to shift to the setting confirmation state, and such a configuration can prevent the set value from being illegally confirmed when the front door 1b is not opened. Further, in the configuration of shifting to the setting confirmation state on condition that the detection corresponding to the opening of the front door 1b is performed, the door opening detection switch 25 corresponds to the opening of the front door 1b after shifting to the setting confirmation state. It is preferable to maintain the setting confirmation state even if the detection is not performed. Therefore, even if the front door 1b is temporarily closed during the setting confirmation, the operation for shifting to the setting confirmation state again is performed. It is not necessary and the setting confirmation operation is not complicated. Further, when the setting key switch 37 is turned off after the start switch 7 is operated to confirm the set value after shifting to the setting confirmation state, the door open detection switch 25 detects the front door 1b to be opened. It may be configured to end the setting confirmation state and return to the state where the game can proceed on the condition that the setting is confirmed. Even in such a configuration, the front door 1b is illegally not opened. It is possible to prevent the set value from being confirmed.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not a voltage drop signal from the power failure detection circuit 48 is detected each time the timer interruption process (main) is executed. When the determination process is performed and it is determined that the voltage drop signal is detected in the power failure determination process, the power failure process (main) for setting the data for determining whether the data in the RAM 41c is normal at the next recovery is performed. Run.

Then, the main control unit 41 returns the processing state of the main control unit 41 to the state before the power failure based on the data stored in the RAM 41c, on condition that the data of the RAM 41c is normal at the time of its activation. However, when the data in the RAM 41c is not normal, it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the RAM abnormality error code is set in the register to control the RAM abnormality error state, and the progress of the game is disabled.

The error state shifts to the normal error state that is canceled by the reset operation (operation of the reset / setting switch 38 or the reset switch 23) and the setting change state described above, and is canceled until a new setting value is set. The RAM error state is a special error state, including the special error state without, and once controlled to the RAM error error state, it shifts to the setting change state and is released until a new setting value is set. Will not be done.

Further, the sub control unit 91 also determines whether or not the voltage drop signal from the power failure detection circuit 98 is detected in the timer interrupt process (sub), and when it is determined that the voltage drop signal is detected, the sub control unit 91 also determines. Execute the power cut processing (sub). In the power cut processing (sub), the error history recording processing described later is executed, and the error history data in the diagnostic data of the RAM 91c indicates that the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped, that is, the power is turned off. Of the data stored in the RAM 91c, the control state data and the diagnostic data described later are duplicated in the backup RAM 61 as backup data, and at the next return, it is determined whether the data in the RAM 91c is normal (destruction determination). ) Is set in the backup RAM 61 as backup data, which is the destruction determination data (calculated value of the check sum of the control state data of the RAM 91c).

Then, the sub control unit 91 executes a start-up process (sub) described later at the time of start-up, and sets the backup RAM 61 on the condition that the control state data among the backup data stored in the backup RAM 61 is normal. By setting the stored control state data in the RAM 91c, the data in the RAM 91c is returned to the state before the power failure, and the processing state of the sub control unit 91 is changed to the state before the power failure based on the restored control state data. However, if the control state data of the backup data is not normal, it is determined that the backup RAM 61 is abnormal, and the control state data of the backup data is not returned to the RAM 91c.

Further, when the control state data of the backup data is not returned to the RAM 91c, the RAM 91c is only left in the initialized state, and the execution of the effect is not disabled. Further, even when the control state data of the backup data is returned to the RAM 91c, the RAM 91c is initialized when a setting command described later indicating that the setting has been changed is received from the main control unit 41. There is. Also in this case, only the RAM 91c is initialized, and the execution of the effect is not disabled.

Next, the initialization of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 will be described. The usable area of the storage area of the RAM 41c is divided into a game RAM area, an unused area 4, and a non-game RAM area (see FIG. 7B). Further, the game RAM area is divided into a special work, an important work, a general work, an unused area 3, and a game stack area. The special work is a work in which data that is not initialized even if the set value is changed is stored, and software random numbers, set values, data indicating the game state, and the like are stored. The important work is a work in which data that is inconvenient to be initialized at the end of a specific game state (RB, BB) is stored, and the LED display data, input port, output port input / output data, and game time. The timekeeping counter etc. are stored. The general work is a work in which data that can be initialized at the end of a specific gaming state is stored, and a stop symbol, the number of medals to be paid out, and the like are stored. The unused area 3 is a work that is not used in any of the programs. The game stack area is an area in which data saved from the register of the main control unit 41 is stored during the execution of the game program described later.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 has data in the RAM 41c when the data in the RAM 41c is destroyed when the setting key switch 37 is turned on, and when the data in the RAM 41c is started when the setting key switch 37 is turned on. Each initial is when the initialization condition consisting of five is satisfied: when it is not destroyed, when the setting change state is finished, when the specific game state (RB, BB) is finished, and when one game is finished. Five types of initialization with different regions to be initialized are performed according to the initialization conditions.

Initialization 0 is initialization performed when the data in the RAM 41c is destroyed when the setting key switch 37 is started in the ON state, and initialization 0 initializes the entire usable area. .. Initialization 1 is initialization performed when the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed when the setting key switch 37 is started in the ON state, and in initialization 1, the area other than the special work of the game RAM area is not. All areas of the game RAM area are initialized. Initialization 2 is initialization performed after the setting change state is completed by starting the setting key switch 37 in the ON state, and in initialization 2, the special work and the game stack area (in use) in the game RAM area. Areas other than) are initialized. The initialization 3 is an initialization performed at the end of a specific game state, and in the initialization 3, the general work, the unused area 3 and the game stack area (unused) in the game RAM area are initialized. The initialization 4 is an initialization performed at the end of one game, and in the initialization 4, the unused area 3 of the game RAM area and the game stack area (unused) are initialized. The storage area of the data indicating the set value and the game state is allocated to the special work, and the data of the RAM 41c is not destroyed at the time of starting with the setting key switch 37 ON, that is, the data of the RAM 41c. If is normal and the setting is changed, the set value and the data indicating the game state will be retained. Further, the storage area of the timer counter described later is allocated to the important work, and is held without being initialized at the end of the game or the end of a specific gaming state.

Further, in the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment, when the above-mentioned initialization is executed, the start address and the end address are designated as the RAM addresses to be initialized, so that the main control unit 41 is one byte from the designated start address. After overwriting the data of 1 with 0, the logical sum of the 1-byte data is calculated, and if the calculation result is 0, the process of moving to the next address is repeated until the specified end address is reached. , Initializes the RAM area in the specified address range.

When the main control unit 41 in this embodiment is started due to the occurrence of a reset, the start-up setting is performed. In the startup setting, the status flag provided in the main control unit 41 is initialized. The status flag is data that holds the state of the operation result and the execution result of the instruction, and includes the interrupt master permission flag that sets the prohibition / permission of interrupt in particular. Since the initial value of the interrupt master permission flag is a value indicating that interrupts are prohibited, the main control unit 41 is started in a state where interrupts are prohibited. After that, after setting various functions by referring to the HW parameters described later, when a reset occurs according to the program stored in the program / data area, it is started in the interrupt-prohibited state and then executed first. Start the initial setting process.

In the initial setting process, the main control unit 41 first sets the interrupt to prohibit, then determines whether or not the setting key switch 37 is in the ON state at startup, and the setting key switch 37 is ON at startup. When it is determined that the state is in the state, the process proceeds to the setting change process, and the RAM 41c is initialized at the start of the setting change process. At this time, if the data in the RAM 41c is normal, by holding the special work and initializing the other areas, even after the setting change, a part of the control state (setting value, game state, etc.) before the change can be obtained. While it can be retained, if the data in the RAM 41c is not normal, by initializing all the usable areas including the special work, it is possible to reliably eliminate the abnormality in the data in the RAM 41c. It has become.

After initializing the RAM 41c, interrupt is set to allow, the set value is updated by 1 in the range of 1 to 6 each time the reset / setting switch 38 is operated, and after the ON of the start switch 7 is detected, The setting value when the ON of the setting key switch 37 is detected is stored in the RAM 41c, and the setting change process is terminated.

In this way, the main control unit 41 is started in a state where the initial value of the interrupt master permission flag is a value indicating the prohibition of interrupts, and interrupts are prohibited. , Since interrupts are set to prohibit and then the initial setting process is executed, it is possible to prevent unintended interrupts from occurring.

Further, after the setting change process is completed, the main control unit 41 executes the main process of performing the process step by step according to the progress of the game for each game unit. Further, in the main process, the RAM 41c is initialized for each game unit, and the RAM 41c is also initialized at the end of the setting change process. Then, after the setting change processing is completed, the main processing is started from the stage before the processing for initializing the RAM 41c in the main processing, and the initialization of the RAM 41c after the setting change processing is completed and the game unit. Initialization of each RAM 41c can be performed by a common process.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment initializes a predetermined area of the RAM 41c by executing a game area initialization process in the setting change process and the main process. In the game area initialization process, the capacity of the initialization target RAM is calculated by designating the start address and end address of the initialization target RAM, and the capacity of the initialization target RAM is calculated from the start address of the initialization target RAM. By sequentially clearing the minutes area, the area of the designated initialization target RAM in the game RAM area is initialized.

By specifying the start address and end address of the RAM to be initialized, the start address is set as the initial value of the specified address, and the process of updating the specified address to the next address after clearing the data of the specified address is performed. The area from the start address to the end address of the initialization target RAM may be initialized by repeatedly executing the operation until the designated address becomes the end address.

In the non-gaming area initialization process of this embodiment, the RAM area corresponding to the capacity of the initialization target RAM is sequentially cleared from the start address of the initialization target RAM (the start address of the unused area 4), so that the initialization target RAM The area from the start address to the end address of, that is, the unused area 4 and the non-gaming RAM area are initialized.

By specifying the start address and end address of the RAM to be initialized, the start address is set as the initial value of the specified address, and the process of updating the specified address to the next address after clearing the data of the specified address is performed. The area from the start address to the end address of the initialization target RAM may be initialized by repeatedly executing the operation until the designated address becomes the end address.

Further, in the non-gaming area initialization process of the present embodiment, by setting the start address of the unused area 4 as the start address of the initialization target RAM, all the areas of the unused area 4 and the non-game area RAM area are initialized. However, the non-game area initialization process may be performed as long as at least a part of the non-game RAM area is initialized, and a part of the non-game RAM area is initialized. However, a part of the non-gaming RAM area and the unused area 4 may be initialized.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the game area initialization process and the non-game area initialization process, the 1-byte data stored in the designated address is overwritten with 0 to clear the data, and then the logic of the 1-byte data is obtained. The sum is calculated to determine whether or not the calculation result is 0, and if the calculation result is not 0, the 1-byte data is overwritten with 0 and cleared again to clear the corresponding address. The configuration is such that the data is cleared, but a configuration in which the 1-byte data stored in the specified address is overwritten with 0 and cleared may be used.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a specified number of bets that can be set according to the gaming state is determined, and the game is provided on the condition that the specified number of bets is set according to the gaming state. Can be started. In this embodiment, the winning line LN is activated when a predetermined number of bets are set according to the gaming state.

Then, in this embodiment, when all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped, the activated winning line (in the case of this embodiment, all the winning lines are always activated, so that the following is valid. A winning line is awarded when a combination of symbols called roles is arranged on the winning line. The combination may be a combination of the same symbols or a combination including different symbols.

The types of winning roles are determined according to the game status, but can be broadly divided into small winning roles that involve payout of medals and re-starting the next game without the need to set the number of bets. There is a game role and a special role with a transition to a game state (RB (regular bonus), BB (big bonus)) that is advantageous to the player. In the following, the small role and the replaying role are collectively referred to as the general role. In order for each winning combination determined according to the gaming state to be won, it is necessary to win the internal lottery described later and set the winning flag of the winning combination in the RAM 41c. Of the winning flags for each of these combinations, the winning flags for the small combination and the replaying combination are valid only in the game in which the flags are set, and are invalid in the next game, but the winning flag for the special combination is , It is valid until the combinations of the allowed combinations are complete by the flag, and is invalid in the game in which the combinations of the allowed combinations are complete. That is, once the winning flag of the special role is won, even if the combination of the winning combination permitted by the flag cannot be aligned, the winning flag is not invalidated and is carried over to the next game. Will be.

Next, the internal lottery of this embodiment will be described. The internal lottery is performed before the display results of all reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are derived (specifically, the start switch 7) whether or not the main control unit 41 allows the winning of each of the above-mentioned winning combinations. Is determined at the time of detection). In the internal lottery, first, a random number value (integer of 0 to 65535) for the internal lottery is acquired when the start switch 7 is detected. Specifically, the value generated by the random number circuit 508b and stored in the random number value register of the random number circuit 508b is set in the lottery work assigned to the RAM 41c. Then, for each winning combination determined according to the gaming state, according to the numerical data stored in the lottery work and the number of determination values of each winning combination determined according to the current gaming state, the number of bets, and the set value. It is determined whether or not to allow the prize.

In the internal lottery, the number of judgment values determined according to the winning combination, the current game state, and the set value to be the target of the internal lottery is sequentially added to the random number value for the internal lottery (numerical data stored in the lottery work). When the numbers are added and the result of the addition overflows, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. Therefore, the winning combination is won with a probability (number of determination values / 65536) according to the magnitude of the number of determination values.

Then, the winning number indicating the result of the internal lottery is set in the RAM 41c. The winning number is used for setting an internal winning flag, navigating notification, command creation, stop control of reels 2L, 2C, 2R, and the like.

When the winning of any of the winning combinations is determined, the winning flag corresponding to the winning combination determined based on the winning number is set in the internal winning flag storage work assigned to the RAM 41c. The internal winning flag storage work is composed of a 2-byte storage area, in which the upper byte is assigned as the special role storage work in which the winning flag of the special combination is set, and the lower byte is the winning of the general combination. It is assigned as a general role storage work for which a flag is set. Specifically, when the special role is won, the winning flag of the special role indicating that the special role is won is set in the special role storage work, and when the general role is won, the general role is won. The winning flag of the general role indicating that effect is set in the general role storage work. If neither combination nor combination of combinations is won, the special combination storage work and the general combination storage work are cleared.

Next, the stop control of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R will be described. The main control unit 41 uses the winning number, the table index stored in the ROM 41b, and the table creation data when the reels start to rotate, and when the reels stop and the reels that are still rotating remain. Refer to it and create a stop control table for each spinning reel. Then, when any operation corresponding to the rotating reel among the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is effectively detected, the stop control table of the corresponding reel is referred to, and the referred stop control table slips. Based on the number of frames, control is performed to stop the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R corresponding to the operated stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R.

In this embodiment, a value of 0 to 4 is set as the number of sliding frames, and it is possible to pull in a maximum of 4 symbols to stop the reel after detecting the stop operation. That is, the stop position of the symbol can be specified from a range of up to 5 frames including the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected. Further, since it is necessary to move one frame to move the reel for one symbol, it is possible to pull in a maximum of four symbols after detecting the stop operation to stop the reel, and stop when the stop operation is detected. It is possible to specify the stop position of a symbol from a range of up to 5 symbols including the operation position.

In this embodiment, when any of the winning combinations is won, when the stop operation is performed, the winning winning combinations can be stopped by aligning them on the winning line within a pull-in range of up to 4 frames. If possible, the control is performed to align and stop the winning combination, and the winning combination is controlled to stop without aligning within the pull-in range of a maximum of 4 frames. If the special role and the small role are won at the same time, such as when the special role is carried over from before the previous game and the small role is won, the maximum on the winning line when the stop operation is performed. If the winning small wins can be aligned and stopped within the pull-in range of 4 frames, the control is performed to align and stop the winning small wins within the draw range of up to 4 frames on the winning line. If it is not possible to pull in, if it is possible to align and stop the winning special roles in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the winning line, control is performed to align and stop them, and the winning combination is Control is performed so that the four frames are stopped without being aligned within the pull-in range. That is, in such a case, the control of aligning the small winning combination on the winning line is prioritized over the special winning combination, and the special winning combination can be won only when the small winning combination cannot be drawn in. If the special role and the small role can be drawn in at the same time, only the small role will be drawn in, and the small role will not be aligned on the winning line at the same time as the special role. Also, when a special role and a small role are won at the same time, the control to align the special role on the winning line is prioritized over the small role, and only when the special role cannot be drawn in, the small role is placed on the winning line. Alignment control may be performed.

Further, in this embodiment, when the special role and the re-game combination are won at the same time, such as when the special role is carried over from before the previous game and the re-game combination is won, the stop operation is performed. At that time, the control is performed so that the symbols of the re-game combination are aligned and stopped within the pull-in range of up to 4 frames on the winning line. In this case, the symbols constituting the re-game combination or the symbols constituting the re-game combination to be elected at the same time are arranged within 5 symbols, that is, within 4 frames for each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. Since it can always be stopped at any position within the pull-in range of 4 frames, if the special role and the re-game combination are won at the same time, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R by the player. Instead, all the re-game roles will be awarded. That is, in such a case, the control of aligning the re-game combination on the winning line is prioritized over the special combination, and the re-game combination is sure to win the prize. If the special role and the re-game role can be drawn in at the same time, only the re-game role is drawn in, and the special role will not be aligned on the winning line at the same time as the re-game role.

In this embodiment, the reel stop control is performed using the stop control table that can specify the number of slip frames for each timing when the stop operation is performed. However, the stop position that can specify the stop position can be specified. A configuration that identifies the stop position from the table and stops the reel at the specified stop position, searches for a stop position that can be stopped at the timing when the stop operation is performed, without using the stop control table or stop position table. Configuration that performs stop control to specify and stop the reel at the specified stop position, stop control using the stop control table, stop control using the stop position table, stop without using the stop control table or stop position table A configuration in which stop control by searching and specifying a stop position may be used together, or a configuration in which a stop control table or a stop position table is partially changed to perform stop control may be used.

In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 measures the game time, which is the time elapsed from the time when the rotation of the reel is started after the start of the game, that is, the time when the rotation of the reel is started. After the end of one game, a specified number of bets are set by inserting medals, etc., and when the game start operation is performed with the game start operation enabled, the reel rotation of the previous game starts. If the game time from which the time counting is started from the time point is the specified time (4.1 seconds in this embodiment) or more, that is, if the specified time has elapsed from the reel rotation start time of the previous game, no wait is generated. At that point, the rotation of the reel for the game in the game is started. On the other hand, after the end of one game, a specified number of bets are set by inserting medals, etc., and when the game start operation is performed with the game start operation enabled, the reel rotation of the previous game starts. If the game time at which the timing is started from the time point is less than the specified time, that is, if the specified time has not elapsed since the start time of the reel rotation of the previous game, a wait is generated and the rotation of the reel is started at that time. Instead, the game waits until the game time at which timing is started from the start of reel rotation of the previous game reaches the specified time, and when the specified time is reached, the rotation of the reel is started.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 controls to output an external output signal indicating a gaming state, an error occurrence state, and the like. These external output signals are output to a hall device such as a hall computer via an information providing terminal board of a game store (hall) in which the external output board 1000 and the slot machine 1 are installed.

The main control unit 41 has a medal IN signal indicating the number of medals used for setting the number of bets, a medal OUT signal indicating the number of medals given to the player due to the occurrence of a prize, and a game state of RB (regular bonus). An RB signal indicating that the game is in progress, a BB signal indicating that the game state is in BB (big bonus), an ART signal indicating the start of ART described later, a door opening signal indicating that the front door 1b is open, and a door opening signal described later. A setting change signal indicating that the mode has been changed to the setting change mode, an insertion error signal indicating an abnormality of the medal selector, and a payout error signal indicating an abnormality of the hopper unit 34 are output.

The external output board 1000 is provided with a relay circuit, a parallel / serial conversion circuit, terminals for each output signal, and is provided with a connector to be connected for electrical connection with the circuit of the information providing terminal board. Of the signals output from the game control board 40, the medal IN signal, medal OUT signal, RB signal, BB signal, and ART signal are directly output to the information providing terminal board as pulse signals via the relay circuit. .. On the other hand, the door open signal, setting change signal, input error signal, and payout error signal are converted into security signals, which are serial signals that can be individually identified by the parallel-serial conversion circuit, to provide information. It is output to the terminal board.

Next, a command transmitted by the main control unit 41 to the sub control unit 91 will be described.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 gives the sub control unit 91 a input number command, a credit command, a control state command, an internal winning command, a push order specifying command, a reel acceleration information command, an acceleration completion command, and a stop operation. Time command, number of slip frames command, stop command, game end command, winning number command, payout number command, payout start command, payout end command, standby command, stop command, error command, return command, setting command, setting confirmation command , Door commands, and multiple types of commands, including operation detection commands. These commands consist of 1-byte type data indicating the type of the command and 1-byte extended data indicating the content of the command, and the sub-control unit 91 can determine the type of the command from the type data.

The number of inserted medals command is a command that can specify the number of inserted medals, that is, the number of medals used to set the number of bets, and is a state from the end of the game (after changing the setting) to the start of the game. , Or when a medal is inserted in a state where the specified number of bets is not set, or when the MAXBET switch 6 is operated to set the number of bets, the medal is transmitted. Further, since the input number command is transmitted when the bet number setting operation is performed, it is possible to specify that the bet number setting operation has been performed by receiving the input number command.

The credit command is a command that can specify the number of medals stored as credits, is a state from the end of the game (after changing the setting) to the start of the game, and in a state where a specified number of bets is set. Sent when a medal is inserted and credits are added.

The control state command is a command that can specify the control state related to the game, and when the start switch 7 is operated to start the game, before the transmission of the internal winning command and the operation of the third stop of the reel are performed. It is sent after the stop command for the third stop is sent, even when it is done. The content of the control status command may change between the start and end of the game. The content of the control status command does not change between the start and end of the game and the plurality of control status commands 1 that can specify the control status. A plurality of control state commands can be specified, including the control state command 2, and the control state command 2 is transmitted after the control state command 1 is transmitted.

The internal winning command is a command that can specify the internal lottery result, and is transmitted when the start switch 7 is operated to start the game and after the ART status command. The internal winning command includes a first internal winning command that can specify whether or not a special winning combination has been won, and a second internal winning command that can specify whether or not a general winning combination has been won. After the internal winning command is transmitted, the second internal winning command is transmitted.

Since the internal winning command is transmitted when the start switch 7 is operated and the game is started, it is possible to specify that the start switch 7 is operated and the game is started by receiving these commands.

The push order specifying command is a command that can specify a stop order that is advantageous to the player, and after each stop command is transmitted every time the stop control accompanying the stop operation of the first stop and the second stop of the reel is performed. Will be sent. In a game in which the navigation notification described later is executed, a command (the above-mentioned control state command) including stop order data capable of specifying a stop order advantageous to the player is transmitted at the start of the game, and the reel number is the first. At the time of the stop operation of the 1st stop and the 2nd stop, the push order specifying command including the stop order data that can specify the advantageous stop order is transmitted, but in the game in which the navigation notification is not executed, the advantageous stop order is confirmed. At the start of the game, which is before the game is started, a command (the control state command described above) containing stop order data in which an advantageous stop order cannot be specified is transmitted, and the first stop and the second stop after the advantageous stop order is determined are transmitted. At the time of the stop operation of, a push order specifying command including advantageous stop order data is transmitted.

The reel acceleration information command is a command that can specify that the rotation of the reel starts with the progress of the game, and is transmitted when the rotation of the reel starts with the progress of the game.

The acceleration completion command is a command that can specify that the acceleration of the reel accompanying the start of the game is completed, and after the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is started when the game is started, all of them are first performed. It is transmitted when the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate at a constant speed.

The stop operation command is a command that can specify whether the reel to be stopped is the left reel, the middle reel, or the right reel, or the area number of the stop operation position of the corresponding reel, and is a command for stopping operation of each reel. It is transmitted every time the accompanying stop control is performed.

The slip frame number command is a command that can specify whether the reel to be stopped is the left reel, the middle reel, or the right reel, and the number of slip frames that move from the stop operation of the corresponding reel to the stop. Therefore, each time the stop control associated with the stop operation of each reel is performed, the corresponding stop operation command is transmitted and then transmitted.

The stop command is a command that can specify whether the reel to be stopped is the left reel, the middle reel, or the right reel, or the area number of the stop position of the corresponding reel, and is a stop control accompanying the stop operation of each reel. Is sent after the corresponding slip frame count command is sent each time.

The stop operation command, the number of slip frames command, and the stop command can all specify whether the reel to be stopped is the left reel, the middle reel, or the right reel, and are accompanied by the stop operation of each reel. Since it is transmitted every time the stop control is performed, it is possible to specify that the stop operation of any of the reels has been performed and the reel to be stopped by receiving these commands.

The game end command is a command that can specify that the game has ended, and is transmitted when the player presses the stop switch to stop the third stop reel and releases the stop switch.

The winning number command is a command that can specify the winning number that can specify the presence or absence of winning and the combination of symbols aligned on the winning line LN, and the player presses the stop switch to stop the third stop reel. , When the stop switch is released, and is transmitted after the game end command is transmitted.

The payout number command is a command that can specify the number of medals to be paid out according to the type of winning or the loss, and is transmitted after the winning number command is transmitted.

Both the game end command and the winning judgment command are transmitted when the player presses the stop switch to stop the third stop reel and releases the stop switch. Therefore, by receiving these commands, It is possible to identify that all the operations necessary for advancing one game have been completed.

The payout start command is a command for notifying the start of payout of medals, and is transmitted when the payout of medals by winning a prize or settlement of credits (including the medal used for setting the bet number) is started. The payout end command is a command for notifying the end of payout of medals, and is transmitted when the payout of medals by winning a prize and settlement of credits is completed.

The standby command is a command indicating that the game shifts to the standby state, and when the game shifts to the standby state after the estimated end time (60 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed without setting the bet number after one game is completed, the credit is given. It is sent after the payout of medals (including the medal used to set the bet number) is completed and the payout end command is sent.

The stop command is a command indicating the occurrence or cancellation of the stop state, and after the end of the BB, when the ending effect waiting time elapses, the stop command indicating the occurrence of the stop state is transmitted, and the reset operation is performed. When the stop state is released, a stop command indicating the release of the stop state is transmitted.

An error command is a command that indicates the occurrence or cancellation of an error state and the type of error state. When an error is determined and controlled to an error state, an error command indicating the occurrence of an error state and its type is sent and reset. When the operation is performed and the error state is cleared, an error command indicating the error state is cleared is sent.

The return command is a command indicating that the main control unit 41 has returned to the control state before the power failure, and is transmitted when the main control unit 41 returns to the control state before the power failure when the main control unit 41 is started.

The setting command is a command that indicates the start or end of the setting change state and the setting value after the setting change. When the setting change state is entered, the setting command indicating the start of the setting change state is sent, and when the setting change state ends, the setting command is sent. A setting command indicating the end of the setting change state and the setting value after the setting change is sent. Further, since the control state of the main control unit 41 is initialized with the transition to the setting change state, it is possible to specify that the control state of the main control unit 41 has been initialized by the setting command indicating the start of the setting. ..

The setting confirmation command is a command indicating the start or end of the setting confirmation state. When the setting confirmation state is entered, the setting confirmation command indicating the start of the setting confirmation is sent, and the setting indicating the end of the setting confirmation is sent when the setting confirmation state ends. A confirmation command is sent.

The door command is a command indicating the detection state of the door open detection switch 25, that is, on (open state) / off (closed state). Is transmitted when the detection state of the door open detection switch 25 changes (on to off, off to on).

The operation detection command is a command indicating the detection state (on / off) of the operation switches (MAXBET switch 6, start switch 7, stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R), and is transmitted at regular time intervals.

Of these commands, commands other than the operation detection command are generated in the main process, temporarily stored in the command queue provided in the RAM 41c, and transmitted in the subsequent command transmission process of the timer interrupt process (main).

On the other hand, the operation detection command is generated based on the detection state of the switch every time the command transmission process of the timer interrupt process (main) is executed 10 times, and is temporarily stored in the command queue provided in the RAM 41c. , It is transmitted in the command transmission process of the timer interrupt process (main) after that.

Next, the control of the effect executed by the sub control unit 91 based on the command transmitted by the main control unit 41 to the effect control board 90 will be described. When the sub control unit 91 receives a command from the main control unit 41, the sub control unit 91 executes a command reception interrupt process. In the command reception interrupt process, the command acquired from the command transmission line is stored in the reception buffer provided in the RAM 91c.

The sub control unit 91 determines whether or not an unprocessed command is stored in the receive buffer in the timer interrupt processing (sub), and if the unprocessed command is stored, the earliest of them. The control pattern table stored in the ROM 91b is referred to based on the command received in the stage, and the liquid crystal display 51, the effect LED 52a to c, the speakers 53, 54, and the reel LED 55 are referred to based on the control contents registered in the control pattern table. It controls the output of various production devices such as. In the control pattern table, the display pattern of the liquid crystal display 51 corresponding to the type of command, the lighting mode of the effect effects LEDs 52a to c, the output mode of the speakers 53 and 54, and the lighting mode of the reel LED 55 are displayed for each of the plurality of types of effect patterns. Etc., control patterns of these effect devices are registered, and when the sub control unit 91 receives a command, the control registered corresponding to the effect pattern set in the RAM 91c in the game of the control pattern table. Among the patterns, the control pattern corresponding to the type of the received command is referred to, and the output control of the effect device is performed based on the control pattern. As a result, the effect according to the effect pattern and the progress of the game is executed.

If the sub-control unit 91 receives a new command during the execution of the effect triggered by the reception of a certain command, the sub-control unit 91 stops the effect based on the control pattern being executed, and the newly received command is used. An effect based on the corresponding control pattern is executed. That is, even if the production is not completed to the end, when a new command is received, the production that was being executed is canceled and a new production is performed unless the new command received is not the command that triggers the new production. The effect based on the command will be executed.

When the internal winning command is received, the effect pattern is selected at a selection rate according to the result of the internal lottery indicated by the internal winning command, and is set in the RAM 91c. The selection rate of the effect pattern is registered in the effect table stored in the ROM 91b, and when the sub-control unit 91 receives the internal winning command, the effect table is stored in accordance with the result of the internal lottery indicated by the internal winning command. With reference to the registered selection rate, one of a plurality of types of effect patterns is selected according to the selection rate, and the selected effect pattern is set in the RAM 91c as the effect pattern of the game. Therefore, even if the same command is received, a different control pattern is selected depending on the effect pattern selected when the internal winning command is received, and as a result, different effects may be performed depending on the effect pattern.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 has a notification period during which navigation notification can be executed, in which the stop order advantageous to the player is notified by the lighting mode of the game auxiliary display 12 according to the internal lottery result. It is possible to control the assist time (hereinafter referred to as AT). Further, the main control unit 41 can control the replay time (RT) in which the winning probability of the replay combination is relatively high, and the state controlled by AT and RT is referred to as the assist replay time (ART). May be called.

When the main control unit 41 is controlled by the AT, the main control unit 41 executes the navigation notification by winning the navigation target combination according to the game state, and the player is based on the winning number of the winning navigation notification combination. By notifying the stop order that is advantageous to the sub-control unit 91 and transmitting a push order command that can specify the stop order that is advantageous to the player based on the winning number, the liquid crystal display 51 and the like. The navigation effect using is executed. Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 can execute the navigation notification and execute the navigation effect by satisfying certain conditions even in the normal state not controlled by the AT.

FIG. 6 is an address map of the memory area used by the main control unit 41. As shown in FIG. 6, the memory area used by the main control unit 41 includes a memory area (0000H to 7FFFH) allocated to the ROM 41b and a memory area (F000H to FFFFH) allocated to the RAM 41c.

The memory area of the ROM 41b includes a program / data area (0000H to 26FFH) in which a program and fixed data are stored, a ROM comment area (2700H to 277FH) in which arbitrary data such as a program title and version can be set, and a later description. Vector table area (2780H to 27A7H) where the upper address of the subroutine of the CALLV instruction to be executed and the start address of the timer interrupt processing (main) are set, and parameters for setting the internal functions of the main control unit 41 in terms of hardware. The HW parameter area (27A8H to 27FFH) in which is set and the unused area (2800H to 7FFFH) in which access is prohibited are included.

The parameters set in the HW parameter area in the ROM 41b include the final address (HPRGEND) of the ROM area used in the program / data area, the start address (HRAMSTAT) and the final address (HRAMEND) of the RAM area for which access is prohibited.

The memory area of the RAM 41c is an internal function register area (F4B0H to) in which a usable area (F000H to F400H) that can be used as a work and a register group for controlling each function mounted on the main control unit 41 are stored. F6FFH) and unused areas (F401H to F4AFH, F700H to FFFFH) for which access is prohibited.

FIG. 7 is an address map of the program / data area in the ROM 41b of the main control unit 41 and the usable area in the RAM 41c.

As shown in FIG. 7A, the program / data area in the ROM 41b includes a game program area in which a game program related to the progress of the game is stored, a game data area in which the game data used by the game program is stored, and a game data area in which the game data is stored. It includes a used area 1, a non-game program area in which a non-game program not related to the progress of a game is stored, a non-game data area in which non-game data used by the non-game program is stored, and an unused area 2. ..

The progress of the game is to proceed with a series of processes constituting the game, and if it is a slot machine, the stage where the bet number is set and the game can be started, the game is started and the reel is rotated. The stage of causing the reel to be stopped, the stage of deriving the display result, and the stage of giving the value of a medal or the like according to the display result are advanced.

The game program area related to the progress of the game and the non-game program not related to the progress of the game are separately allocated, and are allocated rearward in the storage area of ROM 41b among the game program area and the non-program area. Since an unused area 1 of at least 16 bytes or more is allocated to the area in front of the non-programmed area, a game program area related to the progress of the game and a non-game program not related to the progress of the game are stored in the storage area. It can be easily identified according to the difference between the two.

In addition, the game program area and the game data area, and the non-game program area and the non-game data area are allotted to continuous areas, while the game program area and the game data area related to the progress of the game and the non-game area not related to the progress of the game. Since the game program and the non-game data area are allocated to the non-consecutive areas sandwiching the unused area 1 of at least 16 bytes or more, the game program area and the game data area related to the progress of the game and the progress of the game A non-gaming program and a non-gaming data area that are not involved can be easily specified according to the difference in the storage area.

The front and back of the above-mentioned storage area are the magnitude relations of the address values assigned to the storage area, and the smaller address is the front and the larger address is the rear. Therefore, the storage area allocated after the one storage area corresponds to the storage area having an address value larger than that of the one storage area, and the storage area allocated before the one storage area. , A storage area whose address value is smaller than that of one storage area is applicable.

Further, the game program may be allocated behind the non-game program area, and the unused area may be allocated in front of the game program allocated behind the non-game program area. A game program area related to the progress of the game and a non-game program not related to the progress of the game can be easily specified according to the difference in the storage area.

Further, the game program area and the non-game program area may be allocated to adjacent areas across the unused area 1, and even with such a configuration, the game program area related to the progress of the game may be used. , A non-game program that is not related to the progress of the game, and a non-game program can be easily specified according to the difference in the storage area.

Further, since 0 values are stored in all the unused areas 1 and 2 of the program / data area of the ROM 41b, the game program area and the game data area, the non-game program area, and the non-game data are stored. The unused areas 1 and 2 can be easily distinguished, and even when invalid data is stored in the unused areas 1 and 2, it can be easily found.

It should be noted that 1 may be stored in all the unused areas 1 and 2 of the program / data area of the ROM 41b, and even in such a configuration, the game program area, the game data area, and the non-game The program area and non-game data can be easily distinguished from the unused areas 1 and 2, and even when invalid data is stored in the unused areas 1 and 2, it can be easily found. ..

Further, if the game program area and the non-game program area are allocated to separate areas, the game program area and the non-game program area may be allocated to adjacent areas. Even with such a configuration, the game program area related to the progress of the game and the non-game program not related to the progress of the game can be easily specified according to the difference in the storage area.

Further, both the game program area and the non-game program area start from the address (0H) where the lower four digits are the same when the address is expressed in binary, and the program / data area of ROM 41b. Of these, the game program area related to the progress of the game and the non-game program area not related to the progress of the game can be easily distinguished from other areas.

Further, in both the game program area and the non-game program area, not only the address of the lower four digits starts from the same 0 address when the address is expressed in binary, but also the value of the lower one digit is expressed in hexadecimal. Starts from the same 0 address (0H), so the game program area and the non-game program area can be easily distinguished from other areas not only when the address is expressed in binary but also when it is expressed in hexadecimal. can do.

In both the game program area and the non-game program area, regardless of whether the address is expressed in binary or hexadecimal, the lower N (N is a natural number of 1 or more) starts from the address having the same value. The game program area and the non-game program area can be easily distinguished from other areas. For example, the value of the lower N (N is a natural number of 1 or more) digits is the same as 1. A similar effect can be obtained with a configuration starting from the address of.

As shown in FIG. 7B, the usable area of the RAM 41c includes a game RAM area used as a work by the game program, a non-game RAM area used by the non-game program as a work, and an unused area 4. The game RAM area includes a special work, an important work, a general work, an unused area 3, and a game stack area in which the game program saves data, and the non-game RAM area includes a game. It includes an area that can be referred to by the program, an area that cannot be referred to by the game program, and a non-game stack area in which the non-game program saves data. In this embodiment, the game stack area and the non-game stack area are individually provided in different areas, but a configuration in which one stack area shared by the game program and the non-game program may be provided may be provided.

The unused area 3 is an area in which neither the game program nor the non-game program is used, and is an area that is surplus with respect to the game RAM area having a predetermined capacity.

Further, the unused area 4 is an area of 16 bytes or more in which neither the game program nor the non-game program is used. Since the game RAM area and the non-game RAM area are allocated to areas that are not continuous with the unused area 4 interposed therebetween, the game RAM area used by the game program related to the progress of the game and the non-game RAM area not related to the progress of the game. The non-gaming RAM area used by the game program and the non-game RAM area can be easily specified according to the difference in the storage area.

In the following, the game program area, the game data area, and the game RAM area may be collectively referred to as a game area, and the non-game program area, the non-game data area, and the non-game RAM area may be collectively referred to as a non-game area. .. Further, the unused area 1, the unused area 2, the unused area 3 and the unused area 4 may be collectively referred to as an unused area.

Based on the parameters set in the HW parameter area, the main control unit 41 permits access to the available area of the RAM 41c when there is an access to the access-prohibited area of the program / data area of the ROM 41b. When there is an access to an area that is not set to, when there is an access to an area other than the program / data area in the ROM 41b, or when there is an access to an area other than the usable area in the RAM 41c. That is, by generating an illegal access reset when there is an access to a memory area that is not accessed in normal operation, the progress of the game is disabled, so that the unused area of ROM 41b and the area not related to the operation are not related. Even when an illegal program is stored in an unused area of the RAM 41c, it is possible to prevent the illegal program from being executed.

In particular, in this embodiment, the game program area and the non-game program area are allocated to the program / data area of the ROM 41b to which access is permitted by the program, and the game program area is assigned to the front of the non-game program area behind the game program area. Unused area 1 is allocated to the area, and a group including the area from the start address of the game program area to the final address of the non-game program in the program / data area based on the parameters set in the HW parameter area. While the access to the area (the area from the game program area to the non-game data area) is set to the permission collectively, the other areas, that is, the game program, the game data, and the non-game program among the program / data areas, Since access to the area after the non-game data in which the non-game data is not stored is prohibited, it is possible to prevent unintended control by an unauthorized program or unauthorized data.

Further, in the program / data area of the ROM 41b that is permitted to be accessed by the program, the game area is allocated behind the non-game program area, and the unused area is in the area in front of the game program area behind the non-game program area. Is assigned, and access to a group of areas including the area from the start address of the non-game program area to the final address of the game program in the program / data area is collectively based on the parameters set in the HW parameter area. Even if access to other areas is prohibited while setting the permission, it is possible to prevent unintended control by malicious programs and malicious data.

A game program area and a non-game program area are allocated to the program / data area, and an unused area 1 is allocated to an area before the non-game program area behind the game program area and the program / data. Of the areas, a group of areas including the game program area (area from the game program area to the game data area) and a group of areas including the non-game program (area from the non-game program area to the non-game data area). Access may be set to permission for each, and access to other areas may be prohibited. Even with such a configuration, the program / data area to which the game program or non-game program is not stored may be selected. Since access to is prohibited, it is possible to prevent unintended control by malicious programs and malicious data. Further, in the program / data area of the ROM 41b that is permitted to be accessed by the program, the game area is allocated behind the non-game program area, and the unused area is in the area in front of the game program area behind the non-game program area. Is assigned, and a group of areas including the game program area (the area from the game program area to the game data area) and a group of areas including the non-game program (from the non-game program area to the non-game area) in the program / data area. Access to each of the areas up to the data area) may be set to allow and access to other areas may be prohibited. Even with such a configuration, the game program or non-game of the program / data area may be set. Since access to the area where the program is not stored is prohibited, it is possible to prevent unintended control by malicious programs and malicious data.

Further, as described above, in this embodiment, the area itself that allows access in the program / data area is set, but by setting the area that prohibits access in the program / data area, the access is indirectly performed. It may be configured so that an area for permitting is set.

The main control unit 41 determines that the user program is executed when the user program is executed in an area other than the designated area where the program running is permitted, that is, in normal operation, based on the parameters set in the HW parameter area. When the user program is executed in a non-existent area, the IAT circuit 506a outputs an IAT generation signal to disable the progress of the game. Even when an unauthorized program is stored in the used area or the like, it is possible to prevent the unauthorized program from being executed.

In particular, in this embodiment, the game program area and the non-game program area are allocated to the program / data area of the ROM 41b to which access is permitted by the program, and the game program area is assigned to the front of the non-game program area behind the game program area. The unused area 1 is allocated to the area, and the IAT circuit 506a permits the program running for each of the game program area and the non-game program area in the program / data area based on the parameters set in the HW parameter area. While it is set as a designated area, program running is prohibited in other areas, that is, in the program / data area where game programs and non-game programs are not stored, so it is not intended due to malicious programs or illegal data. It is possible to prevent control from being performed.

Further, in the program / data area of the ROM 41b that is permitted to be accessed by the program, the game area is allocated behind the non-game program area, and the unused area is in the area in front of the game program area behind the non-game program area. Is assigned, and based on the parameters set in the HW parameter area, the IAT circuit 506a sets each of the game program area and the non-game program area of the program / data area as the designated area for permitting the program running. Therefore, even if the program running in other areas is prohibited, it is possible to prevent unintended control by an illegal program or illegal data.

A game program area and a non-game program area are allocated to the program / data area, and an unused area 1 is allocated to an area before the non-game program area behind the game program area and an HW parameter area. A group of areas including the area from the start address of the game program area to the final address of the non-game program in the program / data area based on the parameters set in (the area from the game program area to the non-game data area). The IAT circuit 506a may be collectively set as a designated area for permitting program running, and program running in other areas may be prohibited. Even in such a configuration, the program / data area may be configured. Of these, since program running in an area where a game program or a non-game program is not stored is prohibited, it is possible to prevent unintended control due to an unauthorized program or unauthorized data. Further, in the program / data area of the ROM 41b that is permitted to be accessed by the program, the game area is allocated behind the non-game program area, and the unused area is in the area in front of the game program area behind the non-game program area. Is assigned, and based on the parameters set in the HW parameter area, a group of areas (from the game program area) including the area from the start address of the non-game program area to the final address of the game program in the program / data area. The area up to the non-gaming data area) is collectively set as a designated area where the IAT circuit 506a allows program running, and even if program running in other areas is prohibited, it is due to an illegal program or illegal data. It is possible to prevent unintended control from being performed.

Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the area itself that permits the program running is set in the program / data area, but indirectly by setting the area that prohibits the program running in the program / data area. The area where the program running is permitted may be set in the configuration.

The program executed by the main control unit 41 includes a main routine that manages the progress of the entire program, and a subroutine that is called during the execution of another program.

Further, a CALL instruction is included as an instruction for causing the main control unit 41 to execute the program stored in the program / data area.

The CALL instruction is an instruction to call and execute a subroutine stored at an address specified in the main routine or the subroutine. When the subroutine is called by the CALL instruction, the main control unit 41 stores the address of the caller in the stack area, and calls and executes the subroutine stored in the designated address. Then, after the subroutine is completed, the address of the caller stored in the stack area, that is, the program of the caller's main routine or the subroutine that executed the CALL instruction is returned.

Further, the CALL instruction includes a normal CALL instruction and a CALLV instruction which is a special CALL instruction. The normal CALL instruction is an instruction that calls a subroutine by specifying both the upper address and the lower address and specifying the address by the specified upper address and lower address, whereas the CALLV instruction specifies only the lower address. By doing so, it is an instruction to specify the address by the upper address and the specified lower address preset in the vector table area of the ROM 41b and call the subroutine, and call the subroutine with a smaller amount of data than the normal CALL instruction. It becomes possible.

The RST instruction is an instruction to call and execute a subroutine stored in a specific address corresponding to a specified value by designating a value corresponding to a plurality of predetermined specific addresses, and is an instruction to execute the above-mentioned ordinary CALL. It is possible to call a subroutine with a smaller amount of data than an instruction or a CALLV instruction. When the subroutine is called by the RST instruction, the main control unit 41 stores the address of the caller in the stack area, and calls and executes the subroutine stored in the specific address corresponding to the specified value. Then, after the subroutine is completed, the address of the caller stored in the stack area, that is, the main routine or the subroutine of the caller who executed the RST instruction is returned.

A jump instruction is an instruction to move to a program stored at an address specified in a main routine or a subroutine. The main control unit 41 moves to the program stored at the address specified by the jump instruction, and executes the destination program. In this case, unlike the CALL instruction and the RST instruction, the program does not return to the original program even if the transferred program ends.

Further, the main control unit 41 includes an LD instruction as an instruction for reading the data stored in the program / data area. The LD instruction is an instruction to read the data stored at the address specified in the main routine or the subroutine to the specified register. The main control unit 41 reads the data stored in the address specified by the LD instruction, and stores the data read in the register specified by the LD instruction.

Of the gaming programs stored in the ROM 41b, the frequently used subroutines are stored in the gaming program area of the ROM 41b where the start address is a specific value (for example, 00H). On the other hand, in the vector table area of the ROM 41b, a specific value is set as the upper address of the subroutine called by the CALLV instruction. Then, the main control unit 41 uses the CALLV instruction to specify only the lower address when calling the subroutine in which the upper address of the start address is the specific value, so that the specific value set in the vector table area as the upper address can be specified. Specify, specify the lower address specified as the lower address, and call and execute the subroutine stored in the combined address of the upper and lower levels. For this reason, the upper address that constitutes a part of the address used when calling the subroutine that is used particularly frequently in the game program is set in advance as a specific value in the vector table, and is based on the specific value set in the vector table. Since the address is specified, it is possible to call a subroutine with a smaller amount of data than a normal CALL instruction that calls a program by specifying both the upper address and the lower address, and when calling these subroutines. It is possible to reduce the waste of the program for specifying the address.

It should be noted that the subroutines that are particularly frequently used among the non-game programs stored in the ROM 41b are stored in the area where the start address is a specific value in the non-game program area of the ROM 41b, and the CALLV instruction is given in the vector table area of the ROM 41b. When a specific value is set as the upper address of the subroutine to be called in and the main control unit 41 calls a subroutine whose upper address of the start address is a specific value, these subroutines are specified by using the CALLV instruction to specify only the lower address. Even if the configuration is such that the program is called and executed, it is possible to call the subroutine with a smaller amount of data compared to the normal CALL instruction that calls the program by specifying both the upper address and the lower address, and these subroutines can be called. It is possible to reduce the waste of the program for specifying the address when calling.

Further, the upper address used when calling by the CALLV instruction may be set to a specific register of the main control unit 41 instead of the vector table area.

Further, not limited to the CALLV instruction, a part of the address is specified by using the value stored in the vector table area, the value set in the specific register, etc., and the subroutine is specified by specifying the remaining part of the address. If the configuration uses a special CALL instruction that makes it possible to specify the storage address of the subroutine, it is possible to reduce the waste of the program for specifying the address when calling the subroutine. In addition, identification values are assigned to each of the multiple areas that make up the vector table area, and the amount of data is smaller than the address. By setting the storage address of the subroutine in each of these multiple areas and specifying the identification value, identification is possible. Even in a configuration using a special CALL instruction that can specify the storage address of the subroutine stored in the area corresponding to the value, it is possible to reduce the waste of the program for specifying the address when calling the subroutine. ..

Further, the game data which is particularly frequently used among the game data stored in the ROM 41b is stored in the area where the start address is a specific value in the game data area of the ROM 41b, and a special LD is stored in the vector table area of the ROM 41b. By setting a specific value as the upper address of the data to be read by the command, and when the main control unit 41 calls the game data in which the upper address of the start address is the specific value, only the lower address is specified by using a special LD command. Even in the case of a configuration for reading these game data, it is possible to call the game data with a smaller amount of data as compared with a normal LD instruction for reading data by designating both the upper address and the lower address. It is possible to reduce the waste of the program for specifying the address when reading the game data of.

Further, the non-game data stored in the ROM 41b, which is particularly frequently used, is stored in the non-game data area of the ROM 41b where the start address is a specific value, and is stored in the vector table area of the ROM 41b. When a specific value is set as the upper address of the data to be read by the special LD instruction and the main control unit 41 calls the non-gaming data in which the upper address of the start address is the specific value, only the lower address is used by the special LD instruction. By specifying, even if the configuration is such that these non-game data are read, the non-game data is called with a smaller amount of data than the normal LD instruction that reads data by specifying both the upper address and the lower address. This makes it possible to reduce the waste of the program for specifying an address when reading these non-game data.

Further, even in these cases, the upper address used when calling with a special LD instruction may be set to a specific register of the main control unit 41 instead of the vector table area.

In addition, a part of the address is specified using the value stored in the vector table area, the value set in a specific register, etc., and the data storage address can be specified by specifying the remaining part of the address. If the configuration uses the special LD instruction, it is possible to reduce the waste of the program for specifying the address when reading the data. In addition, identification values that have a smaller amount of data than the addresses are assigned to each of the multiple areas that make up the vector table area, data storage addresses are set for each of these multiple areas, and identification values are specified. Even in a configuration using a special LD instruction that can specify the storage address of the data stored in the area corresponding to the value, it is possible to reduce the waste of the program for specifying the address when reading the data. ..

The main control unit 41 is activated by the occurrence of a system reset by inputting a system reset signal, a WDT reset by WDT506b, and the above-mentioned illegal access reset. At this time, the value set in the vector table area, that is, The upper address of the subroutine of the CALLV instruction and the start address of the timer interrupt process (main) are values indicating the area in which the program or the like is actually stored in the program area, or FFFFH (in an unused vector table area). It is determined whether it is a value to be set), and if the value set in the vector table area is neither a value indicating outside the area where the program is set nor FFFFH, it will not start. , It is possible to prevent the originally unintended processing from being executed due to the occurrence of interruption or the like in advance.

The game program is a program related to the progress of the game, and is a program for executing a process that hinders the progress of the game unless the process based on the program is executed. On the other hand, the non-game program is a program that is not related to the progress of the game, and the game can be progressed even when the program is called from the game program and the process based on the program is not executed and the game returns to the game program. It is a program for executing processing.

As shown in FIG. 8, the game program includes a game-dedicated program included only in the game program, and a common determination program and a common general-purpose program included in both the game program and the non-game program.

The game-dedicated program includes, for example, a game start waiting process, an internal lottery process, a reel control process, a game end setting process, an external output 1 process, an initial setting process, a power failure process, an abnormal winning determination process, and an error process. In the game start waiting process, after the control of one game is completed, the number of bets is set by inserting medals, etc., and after the specified number of bets is set, the start switch 7 is operated to start the game. The internal lottery process is a process of performing an internal lottery and setting a winning flag, etc., and the reel control process is to start the rotation of the reel and operate the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R. This is a process for stopping the reel with, and the game end setting process determines whether or not a prize has been generated according to the stop position of the stopped reel, and pays out medals, sets the re-game, and sets the game state. The external output 1 process is a process for performing a transition, etc., and is a process for controlling the output of a medal IN signal, a medal OUT signal, an RB signal, a BB signal, and an RT signal among external output signals. , The initial setting process is a process for making the game possible when the power is turned on (backup error confirmation, register initialization, etc.), and the power failure process is the state before the power failure after the power failure occurs. It is a process for enabling recovery, the abnormal winning determination process is a process for determining whether or not an abnormal winning is generated by an unacceptable winning combination, and the error processing is a process for determining various abnormalities (medals). Insertion abnormality, foreign matter detection in medal selector 29, reel rotation abnormality, medal payout abnormality, foreign matter detection near the payout exit, RAM abnormality, set value abnormality, empty hopper tank 34a, full tank detection of overflow tank 35, abnormality This is a process for disabling the game when a winning prize, etc.) is detected. Further, although not particularly shown, the game program also includes the above-mentioned processing related to AT (control related to lottery related to AT, control related to navigation notification, etc.).

The common determination program in the game program includes, for example, an input determination process and a payout determination process. The insertion determination process is a process of determining whether or not the medal has passed normally by the insertion medal sensor 31, and is a process executed in a state where medals can be inserted for setting the number of bets and the like. The payout determination process is a process of determining whether or not the medal has passed normally by the payout sensor 34c, and is a process executed in a state where the payout of the medal is permitted at the time of winning a small winning combination or at the time of settlement of credits. Is.

The common general-purpose program in the game program is a process called and executed from a plurality of types of processes constituting the game program, and is, for example, a counter update process, a port input process, a data conversion process, an LED display process, a data setting process, and the like. Includes command setting processing. The counter update process is a process for updating the specified counter value, the port input process is a process for acquiring the input state of the specified port, and the data conversion process is input using game data. It is a process of converting and outputting the data, the LED display process is a process of setting to display the specified value on the LED, and the data setting process is a process of setting the specified data. The command setting process is a process for setting a specified command in the command queue.

In particular, when an abnormality is detected as described above, the game program resets the setting value according to the type of abnormality (random number abnormality, RAM abnormality, backup abnormality, setting value abnormality, and resets it. In the case of an abnormality other than the above, it includes an error process that disables the progress of the game until the reset operation) is established.

As shown in FIG. 8, the non-game program includes a non-game dedicated program included only in the non-game program, and the same common determination program and common general-purpose program as the game program.

The non-game dedicated program is, for example, test signal output processing, foreign matter detection processing, door monitoring processing, external output 2 processing, input medal error determination processing, payout medal error determination processing, power failure determination processing, normal command transmission processing, and power failure. Includes time command transmission processing. The test signal output process is a process for outputting a test signal generated in connection with the result of the game, and the foreign object detection process is a process for detecting a foreign object in the medal passage by the slot sensor 26. The door monitoring process is a process for detecting the opening of the front door 1b, and the external output 2 process is a security signal (door opening signal, setting change signal, closing error signal, payout error signal) among the external output signals. It is a process for performing output control, and the inserted medal error determination process detects the backflow of the inserted medal, the medal jam detection in the medal selector 29, and the foreign matter detection in the medal selector 29 based on the detection status of the inserted medal sensor 31. The payout medal error determination process is a process for detecting the backflow of the payout medal, the medal jam detection near the payout exit, and the foreign matter detection near the payout exit based on the detection status of the payout sensor 34c. The power failure determination process is a process for determining whether or not a voltage drop signal from the power failure detection circuit 48 is detected, and the normal command transmission process is a command setting for a game-dedicated program and a non-game-dedicated program. It is a process for transmitting the first command set in the command queue by the process to the sub-control unit 91, and the command transmission process at the time of power failure is set in the command queue. This is a process for transmitting all the existing commands to the sub-control unit 91.

The common general-purpose program in the non-game program is a process called and executed from a plurality of types of processes constituting the non-game program, and is, for example, a counter update process, a port input process, and the same as the common general-purpose program in the game program. Includes data conversion processing, LED display processing, data setting processing, and command setting processing.

The non-game program includes a process of determining whether or not the detection status is a predetermined one based on the detection status of the detection means (input port sensor 26, full tank sensor 35a, door open detection switch 25) not related to the progress of the game.

In addition, the non-game program functions as a detection means related to the progress of the game in a specific control state among a plurality of control states (game start waiting process, internal lottery process, reel control process, game end time setting process). In other control states, the detection means (for example, the throw-in medal sensor 31, the payout sensor 34c) that functions as the detection means that is not related to the progress of the game is based on the detection status in the control state that is not related to the progress of the game. Processing to determine whether or not the detection status is predetermined (for example, detection processing of inserted medals and detection processing of paid medals for detecting an abnormality caused by detection of insertion of medals during reel rotation or withdrawal of medals). include. It should be noted that such a determination process corresponds to a common determination program because it is the same process as the process of determining whether or not the game has a predetermined detection status based on the detection status in the control state related to the progress of the game in the game program. ..

Among the processes included in the game program, the number of medals to be paid out in the external output 1 process, the process of counting the number of medals inserted in the game start waiting process, the process of switching the flow path switching solenoid 30, and the process of setting at the end of the game. Processing that counts, processing that detects that the hopper tank 34a is empty, processing that updates software random numbers, processing related to AT, processing that sends internal winning commands, etc. that are not directly related to the progress of the game If so, all or part of these processes may be included in the non-game program. On the other hand, if the processes included in the non-game program are indirectly related to the progress of the game, all or part of these processes may be included in the game program.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 calls the non-game program in the process based on the game program, executes the process based on the non-game program, and after the processing based on the non-game program is completed. , Return to the process based on the game program.

As shown in FIG. 9, in principle, when executing the process based on the game program, the CPU 41a executes the process based on the game program with reference to the game data in the game data area, and uses the game RAM area as a work. , It is possible to refer to and update the contents of the game RAM area. Further, in principle, when the CPU 41a executes the process based on the non-game program, the CPU 41a executes the process based on the non-game program with reference to the game data in the non-game data area, and uses the non-game RAM area as a work. It is possible to refer to and update the contents of the non-gaming RAM area.

Further, the CPU 41a does not refer to the non-game data area and does not update the non-game RAM area when executing the process based on the game program, but it is possible to refer to the non-game RAM area. , In executing the process based on the non-game program, the game data area is not referred to and the game RAM area is not updated, but the game RAM area can be referred to.

Further, in the processing based on the game program, only a specific area required for the game program (for example, an error flag setting area indicating abnormality detection) can be referred to in the non-game RAM area, and the non-game program can be referred to. The processing based on the game RAM area can be referred only to a specific area required for the non-game program (for example, an internal winning flag setting area, a game state setting area, an RT setting area, etc.). Further, a specific area in the non-game RAM area to which processing based on the game program can be referred to, and a specific area in the game RAM area to which processing based on the non-game program can be referred to may be allocated to continuous address areas. Although it is preferable, a configuration may be used in which a part or all of the address area is not contiguous.

As described above, in this embodiment, the game program area in which the game program related to the progress of the game is stored, the game data area in which the game data referred to by the game program is readable, and the work data referred to by the game program. A game RAM area that is readable and writable, a non-game program area that is a program called by the game program and stores a non-game program that is not related to the progress of the game, and a non-game that the non-game program refers to. Since the non-game data area in which the data is readable and stored and the non-game RAM area in which the work data referred to by the non-game program is readable and writable are allocated separately, the game program, The game data and the work data of the game program, and the non-game program, the non-game data, and the work data of the non-game program can be easily specified according to the difference in the storage area.

Further, by separating the game program area and the game data area from the non-game program area and the non-game data area, the area occupied by the ROM 41b can be compactly managed according to each function. It will be easier to identify the relevant data.

Further, in the present embodiment, the non-game RAM area can be referred to when the game program is executed, and the game RAM area can be referred to when the non-game program is executed. When executing the game program, the data used by the non-game program can be easily used, and when executing the non-game program, the data used by the game program can be easily used. On the other hand, it is impossible to update the non-game RAM area when executing the game program, and it is impossible to update the game RAM area when executing the non-game program. Does not affect the processing of the non-gaming program, and the non-gaming program does not affect the processing of the gaming program.

Further, in this embodiment, the processing based on the game program can refer only to a specific area (for example, an error flag setting area indicating abnormality detection) required for the game program in the non-game RAM area. , The processing based on the non-game program can refer only to a specific area (for example, an internal winning flag setting area, a game state setting area, an RT setting area, etc.) necessary for the non-game program in the game RAM area. Therefore, since the data that the game program can refer to in the non-game RAM area and the data that the non-game program can refer to are limited to a specific area, the reference destination of the game program or the non-game program can be easily specified. be able to.

As shown in FIG. 10 (a), the main control unit 41 of this embodiment can call a non-game program from a process based on the game program while the main process is being executed, and FIG. 10 (b) shows. As shown, it is possible to call a non-game program from a process based on the game program while the timer interrupt process is being executed.

As shown in FIG. 10A, when a non-game program is called from the main process based on the game program, the game program sets the start address of the non-game program to be called in a specific area and performs a common call process. Execute 1. The common call process 1 is a process included in the game program. In the common call process 1, the register of the game program is saved in the game stack area, and the stack pointer (SP, the address indicating the current position of the game stack area) is saved. Is saved in the SP save area of the game RAM area, and then the timer interrupt is set to prohibit by setting the value of the interrupt master permission flag to the value indicating interrupt prohibition, and then set to a specific area. Call the non-gaming program at the address you are using.

On the other hand, based on the called non-game program, the stack pointer (non-SP, address indicating the current position of the non-game stack area) of the non-game program was set, and the processing of the non-game program was executed. After that, it returns to the game program of the caller, that is, the common call process 1.

After returning to the common call process 1, the common call process 1 releases the prohibition of the timer interrupt by setting the value of the interrupt master permission flag to the value indicating the interrupt permission, and saves the game stack area and the SP. Based on the data saved in the area, the register and the stack pointer of the game program are returned to the state before calling the non-game program, and the process ends.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the game program calls the non-game program, the interrupt is set to be prohibited by the common call process 1, and when the non-game program returns to the game program, the interrupt is performed. Since the prohibition is lifted, the interruption can be set to be prohibited for the period during which the non-game program is running.

When the non-game program is called from the main process based on the game program, the non-game program first sets the interruption to prohibit, then executes various processes, and ends the non-game program. It may be configured to cancel the prohibition of interrupts, and by such a configuration, it is possible to set the prohibition of interrupts during the period in which the non-game program is being executed, as in the present embodiment. Further, since the interruption is prohibited and canceled by the non-game program, it is not necessary to set and cancel the interruption prohibition in the common call process 1 of the game program, and the capacity of the game program can be reduced. ..

As shown in FIG. 10B, when a non-game program is called from a timer interrupt process based on a game program, the game program sets the start address of the non-game program to be called in a specific area and is common. The call process 2 is executed. In the common call process 2, the register of the game program is saved in the game stack area, and the stack pointer (SP, the address indicating the current position of the game stack area) is saved in the SP save area of the game RAM area, and then specified. Call the non-game program of the address set in the area of.

On the other hand, the called non-game program sets the stack pointer of the non-game program, executes the process of the non-game program, and then returns to the common call process 2 of the caller.

After returning to the common call process 2, the common call process 2 changes the register and the stack pointer of the game program to the state before calling the non-game program based on the data saved in the game stack area and the SP save area. Return and finish.

As described above, unlike the call common process 1, the common call process 2 does not set and cancel the timer interrupt as prohibited, but as described above, the main control unit 41 performs other interrupts during the execution of the timer interrupt process. Since the execution of the interrupt process is prohibited, the interrupt can be prohibited for the period during which the non-game program is executed.

In this embodiment, when the game program executes the common call process 1 and the common call process 2 to call the non-game program and execute the non-game program, the register actually used by the game program is used. Since the process of saving and protecting all the areas of the register is performed regardless of the presence or absence, when returning to the game program, it is possible to surely return from the state at the time when the non-game program is called. ..

It should be noted that, without executing the common call process 1 and the common call process 2, the value of the register used by the game program immediately before calling the non-game program from the process based on the game program in the game program is protected, and the non-game program is protected. After all the processing based on the above is completed, the value of the protected register at the first stage of returning to the game program may be restored. With such a configuration, the register may be restored before the non-game program is called. Since the protection process is performed and the register recovery process is performed after returning from the non-game program, the data stored in the register by the non-game program does not affect the game program.

Further, when the non-game program is called, the non-game program first saves the stack pointer and register of the game program, and finally restores the stack pointer and register of the game program. Also, with such a configuration, when returning to the game program, it is possible to surely return from the state at the time when the non-game program was called, and the game program can be restored. The capacity can be reduced.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment can mainly execute a timer interrupt process (main) that interrupts and executes a main process at regular intervals (intervals of about 0.56 ms). The timer interrupt process (main) is a process executed by an interrupt generated according to the count of the timer circuit 509, and the address in which the timer interrupt process (main) program is stored is a vector table. It is set as a value corresponding to the timer interrupt of. Then, when a timer interrupt occurs, processing from the address is executed. In addition, other interrupts are automatically prohibited during the execution period of the timer interrupt process (main).

In this embodiment, the timer interrupt process (main) is included in the game program, while the power failure determination process, the power interruption command transmission process, and the normal command transmission process executed in the timer interrupt process (main). The door monitoring process is included in the non-game program, and the main control unit 41 sets interrupt prohibition in the timer interrupt process (main), saves the stack pointer and registers of the game program, and then saves them. It is designed to call the non-game program of. Further, when the timer interrupt processing (main) is returned from these non-game programs, the stack pointer and the register of the game program are returned to the state before the non-game program is called, and then the subsequent processing is performed. It is designed to run. Since the main control unit 41 is set to prohibit other interrupts during the execution of the interrupt process, the main control unit 41 executes the subsequent process in the interrupt-prohibited state even after returning from the non-game program. do.

In addition, the non-gaming program that is executed in the timer interrupt process (main), such as power failure determination process, power failure command transmission process, normal command transmission process, and door monitoring process, must be executed before these non-game programs. Processing other than certain processing (for example, port input processing that needs to be executed before branching of the timer interrupt, motor phase signal output processing), that is, whether it is performed before or after the non-game program has a control effect. It is designed to be executed before no processing.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can execute a game program related to the progress of the game and a non-game program which is a program called by the game program and is not related to the progress of the game. In addition to executing the main process based on the program, it is possible to interrupt the main process at predetermined time intervals and execute the timer interrupt process (main) based on the game program, and the timer interrupt process can also be executed from the main process. It is also possible to call and execute a non-game program from (main).

In such a configuration, the main control unit 41 may malfunction due to the timer interrupt processing (main) being executed while the non-game program is being executed.

On the other hand, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can execute a game program related to the progress of the game and a non-game program which is a program called by the game program and is not related to the progress of the game. It is possible to execute the main process based on the game program, and interrupt the main process at predetermined time intervals to execute the timer interrupt process (main) based on the game program. , In a configuration where it is possible to call and execute a non-game program from the timer interrupt process (main), when calling the non-game program from the main process, after setting the interruption of other processes to prohibited, the relevant While calling a non-game program, when calling a non-game program from the timer interrupt process (main), that is, when calling a non-game program in a situation where further interruption is unlikely to occur, interrupt another process. Since the non-game program is called without being set to prohibit, it is possible to reduce the program capacity related to the prohibition of interruption while preventing malfunction due to the interruption being executed during the execution of the non-game program. ..

The timer interrupt processing (main) executed by the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is processing by a game program, for example, LED dynamic display processing, control signal output processing, etc., and processing by a non-game program, for example, normal time. It is composed of a plurality of processes including a command transmission process and a command transmission process at the time of power interruption, and among a plurality of processes constituting the timer interrupt process (main), a process by a predetermined game program. In particular, since the non-game program is called before the process that can be executed before or after these non-game programs, that is, a plurality of processes constituting the timer interrupt process (main). Since the non-game program is called at the earliest possible stage, for example, even if the timer interrupt process (main) is not completed for some reason and the next timer interrupt occurs and double interrupts occur. , It is possible to prevent other interrupts from being executed while the non-game program is being executed.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment can execute the game program and the non-game program, and has a game stack area for saving data used by the game program and a non-game stack area for saving data used by the non-game program. , Is provided separately, and the main control unit 41 saves the data used by the game program and the data used by the non-game program in the stack area separately provided, so that the stack area is stored. Is easy to manage. In particular, the data used by the game program saved due to the occurrence of the timer interrupt and the data used by the non-game program performed during the execution of the timer interrupt process (main) are mixed and stored in one stack area. Since there is no such thing, stack management is not complicated.

When the non-game program is executed, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment saves the register value used in the game program to the game stack area, then calls the non-game program to perform processing in the non-game program. When the process is executed and the processing in the non-game program is completed, the saved register value is restored, so that the register value used by the game program is prevented from being changed when the non-game program is executed. can.

Further, when the non-game program is called from the process based on the game program, the call common process 1 or the call common process 2 for saving the value of the register used in the game program to the game stack area is called. By standardizing the program for executing the non-game program in the processing, the program capacity can be reduced.

In this embodiment, when the non-game program is called from the process based on the game program in the main process, the call common process 1 is executed, while the non-game program is called from the process based on the game program in the timer interrupt process. At this time, the call common process 2 different from the call common process 1 is executed to save the value of the register used in the game program to the game stack area. However, the main process is based on the game program. A common call common process may be executed both when the non-game program is called from and when the non-game program is called from the process based on the game program in the timer interrupt process.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment has a configuration in which a non-game program can be called and executed from both the main process and the timer interrupt process (main), and the non-game program can be executed from the main process. When calling, set the interruption of other processes to prohibited and call the non-game program, while when calling the non-game program from the timer interrupt process (main), set the interruption of other processes to prohibited. Although it is configured to call the non-game program without doing so, the main control unit 41 may call the non-game program from the main process or the non-game program from the timer interrupt process (main). It may be configured to prohibit the interruption of the processing of.

In such a configuration, the main control unit 41 prohibits interruption of other processes not only when the non-game program is called from the main process but also when the non-game program is called from the timer interrupt process (main). Therefore, as in the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent a malfunction due to the interruption being executed during the execution of the non-game program.

In particular, when the timer interrupt process (main) is executed, the interrupt prohibition is set, and the interrupt prohibition is canceled at the end of the timer interrupt process (main), so that the timer interrupt process (main) Interruption of other processing will be prohibited during execution, but even in this case, interrupting of other processing is prohibited again when calling a non-game program from the timer interrupt processing (main), so something Even if the interrupt prohibition setting is canceled due to the cause, it is possible to prevent a malfunction due to the interrupt being executed during the execution of the non-game program.

Further, as described above, the interrupt prohibition is set when the timer interrupt process (main) is executed, and the interrupt prohibition is canceled at the end of the timer interrupt process (main), so that the timer interrupt process is performed. The configuration is such that interrupts of other processes are prohibited during the execution of (main), but when the interrupt of other processes is prohibited again when calling a non-game program from the timer interrupt process (main). By maintaining the setting for prohibiting interrupts of other processes set at the time of calling the non-game program even after the end of the non-game program, the non-games are executed even though the timer interrupt process (main) is being executed. It is possible to prevent the prohibition of interrupts from being lifted by executing the program.

Next, the initialization of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment initializes the game RAM area, the unused area 4, and the non-game RAM area when it is determined that the stored contents of the RAM 41c are destroyed at the start of the setting change process. That is, initialization 0 is performed to initialize all the usable areas.

Further, when it is determined that the stored contents of the RAM 41c are not destroyed at the start of the setting change process, the area of the game RAM area excluding the special work, the unused area 4, and the non-game RAM area are initialized. That is, initialization 1 is performed to initialize an area other than the special work among the usable areas.

Further, at the end of the setting change process, the important work, the general work, the unused area 3, and the game stack area (unused) in the game RAM area are initialized, that is, the special work and the game stack area in the game RAM area. Perform initialization 2 to initialize areas other than (in use).

Further, at the end of a specific game state and at the end of one game, initialization 3 is performed to initialize the general work, the unused area 3 and the game stack area (unused) in the game RAM area.

Further, at the end of one game, which is not the end of a specific game state, an initialization 4 for initializing an unused area 3 and a game stack area (unused) in the game RAM area is performed.

As described above, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment performs initialization 0 to 4 when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and when the first condition is satisfied as the predetermined condition, the usable area of the RAM 41c is formed. Initialize at least a part of the game RAM area in which the data used by the game program is stored, and when the second condition is satisfied as a predetermined condition, at least a part of the game RAM area and the usable area of the RAM 41c. Initialize at least a portion of the non-gaming RAM area used by the non-gaming program.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11, as the first condition, at the end of one game, the unused area 3 and the game stack area (unused), which are a part of the game RAM area in the usable area. However, the non-gaming RAM area of the usable area is not initialized. Further, as the first condition, at the end of the specific game state, the general work, the unused area 3, and the game stack area (unused), which are a part of the game RAM area among the usable areas, are initialized, but are used. Of the possible areas, the non-gaming RAM area is not initialized. Further, as the first condition, after the setting change state is completed, the important work, the general work, the unused area 3, and the game stack area (unused), which are a part of the game RAM area among the usable areas, are initialized. However, the non-gaming RAM area of the usable area is not initialized.

On the other hand, as a second condition, if there is no abnormality in the RAM when the setting change state is started, the important work, the general work, the unused area 3, which is a part of the game RAM area in the usable area, The game stack area (unused) and the game stack area (used) are initialized, and all areas of the non-game RAM area are initialized. If there is an abnormality in the RAM when the setting change state is started, all the areas of the game RAM area among the usable areas are initialized, and all the areas of the game RAM area are initialized.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can execute a game program related to the progress of the game and a non-game program which is a program called by the game program and is not related to the progress of the game, and is capable of executing the game program and the non-game. It is equipped with a ROM 41b for storing a program.

In such a configuration, if a game program and a non-game program are mixed in one ROM 41b, it is difficult to determine which program is the program related to the progress of the game.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the ROM 41b includes a game program area in which a game program is stored and a non-game program area in which a non-game program is stored, and includes a game program area and a non-game program. Since the area and the area are separately allocated, the game program and the non-game program can be easily specified according to the difference in the storage area.

Further, the main control unit 41 of this embodiment is used as a work of a game program and is used as a game RAM area for storing data used by the game program, and is used as a work of a non-game program and stores data used by the non-game program. A RAM 41c including a non-game RAM area and a non-game RAM area are provided separately, and the game RAM area and the non-game RAM area are separately allocated in the RAM 41c. Therefore, the data used by the game program and the data used by the non-game program are used. The data and the data can be easily specified according to the difference in the storage area, and the main control unit 41 initializes at least a part of the game RAM area when the first initialization condition is satisfied. When the initialization condition of 2 is satisfied, at least a part of the game RAM area is initialized, and at least a part of the non-game RAM area is initialized, so that the data used by the game program stored in the RAM 41c is used. Of the data used by the non-game program, appropriate data can be initialized according to the situation.

As the first initialization condition, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment initializes the unused area 3 and the game stack area (unused), which are a part of the game RAM area, when one game is completed. As the first initialization condition, when the special game state (BB) is finished and one game is finished, the general work, the unused area 3, and the game stack, which are a part of the game RAM area, are finished. When the area (unused) is initialized and the setting change is completed and the main process is started as the first initialization condition, the important work area, the general work area, and the unused area that are a part of the game RAM area are not used. Since the used area 3 and the game stack area (unused) are initialized, appropriate data can be initialized according to the situation.

Further, as the second initialization condition, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment has an important work, a general work, and an unused area which are a part of the game RAM area when there is no abnormality in the RAM at the start of setting change. 3. Initialize the game stack area (unused) and the game stack area (in use), and of the non-game RAM areas, the area referred to by the game program, the area not referred to by the game program, and the non-game stack area ( Unused) and non-game stack area (in use), that is, all areas of the non-game RAM area are initialized, and as a second initialization condition, when there is an abnormality in the RAM at the start of setting change, the game RAM area Of these, the special work, important work, general work, unused area 3, game stack area (unused) and game stack area (in use), that is, all areas of the game RAM area are initialized, and the non-game RAM area is initialized. Of these, in order to initialize all areas of the area referred to by the game program, the area not referred to by the game program, the non-game stack area (unused) and the non-game stack area (in use), that is, the non-game RAM area. , The data used by the gaming program stored in the RAM 41c and the data used by the non-gaming program, which are appropriate depending on the situation, can be initialized.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is configured to initialize a part of the game RAM area when the first initialization condition is satisfied, but the main control unit 41 is the first. When the initialization condition is satisfied, at least a part of the game RAM area may be initialized, and all the areas of the game RAM area may be initialized.

Further, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is configured to initialize a part of the game RAM area and initialize the entire non-game RAM area when the second initialization condition is satisfied. However, the main control unit 41 initializes at least a part of the game RAM area and initializes at least a part of the non-game RAM area when the second initialization condition is satisfied. Any area may be initialized, and all areas of the game RAM area may be initialized, all areas of the non-game RAM area may be initialized, or at least a part of the non-game RAM area may be initialized. It may be the one that initializes all the areas of both the game RAM area and the non-game RAM area.

Since the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment configures the program for initializing the game RAM area and the program for initializing the non-game RAM area as separate programs, the game program is in the non-game RAM area. Since there is no need to initialize, the capacity of the game program can be reduced. Further, the program for initializing the game RAM area can be shared both when the first initialization condition is satisfied and when the second initialization condition is satisfied. Further, a program for initializing the game RAM area is provided as a game program, and a program for initializing the non-game RAM area is provided as a non-game program. It is possible to prevent the game program from affecting the non-game program and the non-game program from affecting the game program without initializing the area.

As the first initialization condition, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment sets the game end processing setting in the main processing, and then determines that it is not the end of a specific game state, that is, the end of one game. By setting the start address of the RAM to be initialized at the end of the game and executing the game area initialization process, a predetermined area of the game RAM area is initialized, so that the game progresses for each game unit. It is possible to initialize a part of the unnecessary game RAM area.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment is activated with the setting key switch 37 turned on, and when the setting change process is started, that is, the second initialization condition is satisfied based on the setting change operation being performed. At that time, the game area initialization process is executed to initialize a predetermined area of the game RAM area, and the non-game area initialization process is executed to initialize the predetermined area of the non-game RAM area. It is possible to initialize both the game RAM area and the non-game RAM area based on the setting change operation (initialization operation) of the game clerk.

The game RAM area of the RAM 41c of the present embodiment includes an unused area 3 that is not used when performing control based on the game program or when performing control based on the non-game program, and includes the first initialization condition. Since the unused area 3 is initialized both when the above is satisfied and when the second initialization condition is satisfied, it is possible to prevent invalid data from being stored in the unused area 3.

In this embodiment, the unused area 3 is initialized both when the first initialization condition is satisfied and when the second initialization condition is satisfied, but at least when the first initialization condition is satisfied. If the unused area 3 is initialized when any one of the conditions is satisfied when the second initialization condition is satisfied, it is possible to prevent invalid data from being stored in the unused area 3. Further, if the first initialization condition is a configuration including a plurality of conditions, and if the configuration is such that the unused area 3 is initialized when at least one of the conditions is satisfied, invalid data is stored in the unused area 3. It can be prevented from being done. The same applies even if the second initialization condition includes a plurality of conditions.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment is used as a work of a game program and is used as a game RAM area for storing data used by the game program, and a non-game area which is used as a work of a non-game program and stores data used by the non-game program. A RAM 41c including a game RAM area is provided, and the RAM 41c has a configuration capable of holding the data stored in the RAM 41c for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped by the backup power supply, and is the main. The control unit 41 starts the initial setting process when the power supply to the slot machine 1 starts, and whether or not the stored contents of the RAM are normal based on the data stored in the RAM 41c held by the backup power supply. If it is determined to be normal, the control is restarted based on the data stored in the RAM 41c.

In such a configuration, whether or not the stored contents of the RAM are normal based on the data stored in both the game RAM area and the non-game RAM area of the RAM 41c when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started. When determining whether or not, the load when resuming control based on the data stored in the RAM 41c becomes excessive.

On the other hand, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment starts the initial setting process when the power supply to the slot machine 1 starts, and the RAM of the game RAM area of the RAM 41c held by the backup power supply It is determined whether or not the stored contents of the RAM are normal based on the parity and the destruction diagnosis data stored in the game RAM area, and if it is determined to be normal, the data stored in the game RAM area and the non-game Control is restarted based on the data stored in the RAM area, and whether or not the non-game data stored in the non-game RAM area that does not hinder the progress of the game is normal or not. By omitting the determination, it is possible to reduce the load when resuming control while ensuring that the game can proceed normally.

The game RAM area of the RAM 41c of the present embodiment includes an unused area 3 that is not used when performing control based on the game program or when performing control based on the non-game program, and includes the main control. The unit 41 executes the initial setting process when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, and in the initial setting process, the RAM parity of the game RAM area including the unused area 3 is calculated, and the calculated RAM is calculated. Since it is determined whether or not the stored contents of the game RAM area are normal based on the parity, it is possible to prevent unauthorized data from being stored in the unused area 3.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment executes the initial setting process when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, and determines whether or not the stored contents of the RAM 41c are destroyed in the initial setting process. , When it is determined that the stored contents of the RAM 41c are destroyed, the RAM error flag is set to control the error processing, and then the error state is maintained without automatically recovering, while the setting key switch 36 When the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started while is ON, the setting change process is controlled, the game area initialization process is executed to initialize the game RAM area, and the non-game area is initialized. Since the process is executed to initialize the non-game RAM area, that is, both the game RAM area and the non-game RAM area are initialized when the error state is cleared, either the game RAM area or the non-game RAM area. It is possible to prevent the game from progressing with an abnormality occurring in the crab.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment sets a RAM error flag when it is determined in the initial setting process that the stored contents of the RAM 41c are destroyed when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started. After that, with the setting key switch 36 turned on, the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, and the setting change process is executed, so that the game is released as the error state is cleared. Although it is configured to initialize both the RAM area and the non-gaming RAM area, the main control unit 41 destroys the stored contents of the RAM 41c in the initial setting process when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started. If it is determined that the game RAM area and the non-game RAM area are both initialized, the error processing may be controlled. In such a configuration, both the game RAM area and the non-game RAM area are initialized when the error processing is controlled. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, either the game RAM area or the non-game RAM area is abnormal. It is possible to prevent the game from progressing while the problem occurs. Further, both the game RAM area and the non-game RAM area may be initialized both when it is determined that the stored contents of the RAM 41c are destroyed and when the setting change process is subsequently executed. Even with the configuration, it is possible to prevent the game from progressing while an abnormality occurs in either the game RAM area or the non-game RAM area.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment executes the power cut processing when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped and the power supply voltage drop is detected by the power cut detection circuit 48. In the power cut process, the RAM 41c By prohibiting access to, access to both the game RAM area and the non-game RAM area is prohibited, so the non-game RAM area that is not subject to judgment as to whether or not the data is corrupted at the next startup is used. This can prevent unauthorized data from being stored.

In the slot machine of this embodiment, the main control unit 41 sets an assist time (hereinafter referred to as AT) which is a notification period in which navigation notification for notifying a stop order which is advantageous for the player can be executed according to the internal lottery result. It is controllable.

When the main control unit 41 is controlled by the AT, the main control unit 41 executes the navigation notification by winning the notification target combination according to the game state, and the sub-control unit 91 receives the first internal winning command. By transmitting the second internal winning command and the push order command, the navigation effect by the sub control unit 91 is executed. Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 can execute the navigation notification and execute the navigation effect by satisfying certain conditions even in the normal state not controlled by the AT. In the navigation notification of this embodiment, the stop order advantageous to the player is identifiable by changing the lighting mode of the game auxiliary display 12.

The notification target combination is one of a plurality of types of internal lottery results corresponding to the notification target combination because the stop order that is advantageous to the player differs depending on the plurality of types of internal lottery results corresponding to the notification target combination. It is a target role of the internal lottery in which the stop order advantageous to the player changes depending on whether the result of the internal lottery of the above type is obtained. The stop order that is advantageous to the player is, for example, the stop order that shifts to a game state that is advantageous to the player, the stop order that avoids the end of the game state that is advantageous to the player, the stop order that wins an advantageous role, and the like. be. In this embodiment, the stop order that is advantageous to the player changes, but the stop timing that is advantageous to the player and the combination of the stop order and the stop timing that is advantageous to the player may change.

In the navigation effect of this embodiment, the stop order advantageous to the player notified by the navigation notification is notified by the display of the navigation image from the liquid crystal display 51 and the output of the navigation voice from the speakers 53 and 54. For example, when notifying the stop order of the left middle right, a stop switch 8L such as "123" (indicating that the left reel is the first stop, the middle reel is the second stop, and the right reel is the third stop). A stop order image showing the stop order of 8C and 8R is displayed. Further, as the navigation voice, for example, a voice indicating the stop order of the stop switch such as "left middle right!" (Indicating that the left reel is the first stop, the middle reel is the second stop, and the right reel is the third stop). Is output. Further, when notifying the stop order in which the left reel is the first stop, the stop order of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R such as "1-" (indicating that the left reel is the first stop) is indicated. Display stop order images. Further, as the navigation voice, for example, a voice indicating the stop order of the stop switch such as "left!" (Indicating that the left reel is the first stop) (indicating that the left reel is the first stop) is output. do. The mode of the navigation effect is not limited to such a mode, and may be any mode as long as the player can distinguish it according to the winning situation. Further, the navigation effect is not limited to the one using the liquid crystal display 51, the speakers 53, 54, and may be executed by using the effect effect LEDs 52a to c, the reel LED 55, and the like.

As described above, in the navigation notification and the navigation effect, the stop order that is advantageous to the player is notified in an identifiable manner. For this reason, the player performs the stop operation in the stop order according to the navigation effect, for example, intentionally shifting to a game state advantageous to the player, and avoiding the end of the game state advantageous to the player. It is possible to win a prize that is intentionally advantageous.

Next, the process for the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment to transmit a command will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 to 17.

At the start of the game, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment updates and updates various control states (for example, whether or not a game state or a navigation notification is executed) with the start of the game. Controls related to the game (for example, internal lottery, navigation notification, lottery regarding advantageous states advantageous to the player, etc.) are performed based on the controlled state, and at the end of the game, the result of the game (for example, each reel) is performed. Various control states are maintained or updated according to the combination of symbols stopped in the game and the result of the lottery regarding the advantageous state). Further, at the start and end of the game, a control state command capable of specifying various control states at that time is transmitted to the sub control unit 91. The control state includes a plurality of types of states that are uniquely set according to the playability and design concept of each model of the slot machine 1, and the number of control state commands is the type of the control state. It is set according to the number.

As shown in FIG. 12, the control state command that can specify the control state is a control state that can specify the control state whose contents can change between the start of one unit of the game and the end of the game. It includes a command 1 and a control state command 2 that is unique to the game and can specify a control state whose contents do not change between the start of the game and the end of the game.

The control state command 1 includes a plurality of game state-related commands capable of specifying a control state related to the game state in the main control unit 41, and AT control during AT, that is, as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. A plurality of AT-related commands A capable of specifying a control state related to being present, and a plurality of AT-related commands B capable of specifying a control state related to non-AT, that is, AT not being controlled. The control state command 2 includes a plurality of in-game unique information commands that can specify a control state unique to the game.

Further, the game state-related command is, for example, a command capable of specifying the game state in the main control unit 41, and when the game state is transferred as a predetermined number of games are played, in the game. A command that can specify the number of remaining games until the controlled game state ends, and when the game state is transferred by paying out a predetermined number of medals, it is controlled by the game. It includes commands and the like that can specify the number of medals remaining until the end of the current game state.

Further, the AT-related command A includes, for example, a command capable of specifying the number of rights controlled by the AT as an advantageous state advantageous to the player, and the remaining game in which the control of the AT controlled in the game is continued. It includes commands that can specify the number.

The AT-related command B includes, for example, a command capable of specifying the cumulative number of normal games played in a normal state in which AT control has not been performed since the control of the previous AT was terminated, and a command in which the normal state has been performed. When the number of games reaches a predetermined number and is controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the right to be controlled by AT, a command that can specify the number of remaining games until the number of games is controlled to the advantageous state, is granted. The number of remaining games until the control of the AT is started is included.

The in-game unique information command group is controlled by, for example, a command that can specify the winning status of the AT lottery that determines whether or not to grant the right to be controlled by the AT as an advantageous state advantageous to the player, the AT. A command that can specify the additional status of the number of games, a command that can specify the stop order that is advantageous for the player, which is determined according to the result of the internal lottery at the start of the game, and a command that is determined according to the result of the internal lottery at the start of the game. A command capable of specifying the type of the effect (for example, a freeze state in which the progress of the game is delayed for a predetermined period, a reel effect performed by using a reel in the freeze state, an effect suggesting an internal lottery result, etc.) is included.

One command transmitted by the main control unit 41 of this embodiment to the sub control unit 91 is composed of 2 bytes (a set of two 1-byte communication data), and the first byte (MODE) is a command. The classification is represented and the second byte (EXT) is designed to represent the content of the command. Each command included in the control state command is also composed of 2 bytes like other commands, and in particular, as shown in FIG. 12, the MODE of each series of commands included in the control state command is transmitted. It is set to consecutive numerical values (B0 to CF in this embodiment) corresponding to each order.

The form of the command shown in this embodiment (a form in which two 1-byte communication data form a set of commands) is an example, and another data form, for example, one communication data is 2 bytes or more. A form in which one command is composed of one or three or more communication data, a form in which these forms are combined, and the like may be used. Further, in this embodiment, the MODE of each command included in the control state command is a continuous numerical value obtained by the sequential addition process (process of adding 1) from the initial value (B0), but other than the addition process. It may be a numerical value obtained by the arithmetic processing (four arithmetic operations, etc.) of.

Further, data indicating the content of a specific command to be transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 as an EXT in each command included in the control state command is executed in the above-mentioned main process and timer interrupt process (main). The data address of each data is set in the area of the predetermined data address of the RAM 41c corresponding to each data by various processes, and the data address of each data is continuous corresponding to the order of transmission, similar to the value of MODE. It is set to be a numerical value to be added, and it can be obtained by sequentially performing addition processing (processing to add 1) from the initial value (data address of the command transmitted first among the control state commands). There is. Data indicating the contents of the command is stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c specified by the data address of each command included in the control state command, and the corresponding data can be directly referred to by referring to the area of the data address. It may be a configuration that can be read out, or a configuration that can indirectly read the corresponding data by referring to the data address, for example, a second address indicating a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is stored in the data address. It is possible to read the corresponding data by further referring to the predetermined area according to the second address, and to calculate the corresponding data by referring to the data address. The data may be obtained as a result of the calculation. By configuring the configuration so that the corresponding data can be indirectly read by referring to the data address, for example, even if the data is not stored in the area of the continuous numerical data address, a predetermined value with respect to the initial value is specified. It is possible to read the corresponding data by arithmetic processing (for example, addition processing).

Next, a game start transmission command setting process, which is a process for transmitting a command executed by the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment and is executed at the start of the game, will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 15. ..

The main control unit 41 executes a winning number setting process when a game start operation is performed, and sets a winning number in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c that can specify the winning status of the internal lottery according to the result of the internal lottery. After that, the stop order data setting process is executed, and the stop order data that is advantageous to the player can be specified according to the internal lottery result, or the stop order that is advantageous to the player cannot be specified, but the standard push order (for example,). The stop order data that can specify the left first stop) is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 91c. After that, the transmission command setting process at the start of the game is executed, and the control state command that can specify the control state at the start of the game and the internal winning command including the winning number that can specify the internal lottery result are sent to the sub control unit 91. Set in the command queue to send to.

As shown in FIG. 13, in the game start transmission command setting process, first, a control state update process for updating the corresponding control state among a plurality of control states is executed as the game is started (Sa1). .. In the control state update process, among the control states, for example, the game state, the number of games remaining until the predetermined game state ends, the number of medals remaining until the predetermined game state ends, and the cumulative number of normal games. Etc., the control state defined by the result of the previous game is maintained without updating. Further, for a control state that can be changed by satisfying a predetermined condition with the start of the game, such as the number of rights controlled by the AT and the number of remaining games controlled by the AT, the predetermined condition is satisfied. Update according to the situation. Further, for example, the control state newly determined with the start of the game, such as the winning status of the AT lottery, the stop order advantageous to the player, and the type of effect, is newly set.

After executing the control status update process in the step of Sa1, the control status command batch setting process for collectively setting the above-mentioned command group included in the control status command that can specify each control status in the command queue is executed (. Sa2).

As shown in FIG. 14, in the control state command batch setting process, the value of MODE set in the predetermined area of RAM 41c is set to the initial value (in this embodiment, the MODE of the game state-related command included in the control state command). Set to a certain B0) (Sb1). Further, the value of the data address set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is set to the initial value (the value of the address of the area in which the data of the game state-related command is stored) (Sb2). Further, the value of the number of processes set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is set to the number of commands included in the control state command group (Sb3).

After that, the timer interrupt is set to prohibit (Sb4), and the MODE of the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is set in the command queue in the state where the timer interrupt is prohibited (Sb5). Then, the data stored in the area of the RAM 41c of the address corresponding to the value of the data address is acquired, set as an EXT in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sb6), and the EXT is set in the command queue (Sb7).

After that, the timer interrupt wait process is executed (Sb8). The timer interrupt wait process is a process of waiting for a period in which the timer interrupt process (main) is performed once. In the timer interrupt wait process, the timer interrupt is set to allow and the timer interrupt process (main) is performed. ) Is executed, and after the timer interrupt process (main) is completed, the process returns to the caller's process. In the timer interrupt process (main), as will be described later, when it is not detected that the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped, the normal command transmission process is performed every time the timer interrupt process (main) is executed. Is executed to transmit the data (MODE and EXT constituting the command) set in the command queue to the sub-control unit 91 byte by byte. Therefore, when the timer interrupt wait process is executed in the step of Sb8, the command transmission process in the normal time is executed, and the MODE and EXT set in the command queue in the steps of Sb5 and Sb7 are set first. The MODE is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 as the first byte of the command.

In the timer interrupt wait process, a new command is not set in the command in the main process during the execution of the timer interrupt wait process. In the timer interrupt process (main) performed during the execution of the timer interrupt wait process, a command may be set and transmitted by, for example, a door open monitoring process or a command transmission process at the time of power failure.

After the timer interrupt waiting process in the step of Sb8 is completed, the timer interrupt waiting process is executed again (Sb9). As a result, the EXT set after the MODE and EXT set in the command queue in the steps of Sb5 and Sb7 by the normal command transmission process executed in the timer interrupt process (main) is the second byte of the command. Is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, and the timer interrupt wait processing is executed twice by the steps of Sb8 and Sb9, so that one set of MODE and EXT constituting one command is sub-controlled. It will be transmitted to the unit 91.

After that, 1 is added to the value of MODE in the predetermined area of RAM 41c (Sb10), and 1 is added to the value of the data address in the predetermined area of RAM 41c (Sb11). Then, the value of the number of processes in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is subtracted by 1 (Sb12), and it is determined whether or not the value of the number of processes remaining after the subtraction is 0 (Sb13). Determines whether MODE and EXT are set in the command queue for the command.

When it is determined in the step of Sb13 that the value of the remaining number of processes is not 0, that is, the MODE and EXT are not set in the command queue for all the commands in the control state command group, and the commands are not yet set in the command queue. If is left, return to the step of Sb4, perform the processing of the steps of Sb5 to Sb7 with the timer interrupt set to be prohibited again, and then execute the processing of the steps of Sb8 and Sb9. MODE and EXT of commands that have not yet been set in the command queue are sequentially set in the command queue, and the process of transmitting to the sub-control unit 91 by the timer interrupt process (main) is repeated.

Then, when it is determined in the step of Sb13 that the remaining number of processes is 0, that is, MODE and EXT are set in the command queue for all the commands included in the control state command group, and transmission is performed to the sub-control unit 91. If this is the case, the control status command batch setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the caller's game start command transmission process.

In the game start command transmission process, after the control state command batch setting process in the Sa2 step is completed, the internal winning command setting process (first internal winning command) is executed (Sa3), and special based on the internal lottery result. The MODE and EXT of the first internal winning command that can specify the winning status of the winning combination are set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. After that, the command setting process for setting the MODE and EXT set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in the command queue in the step of Sa3 is executed (Sa4).

In the command setting process, as shown in FIG. 15, the timer interrupt is set to prohibit (Sc1), the MODE of the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is set in the command queue, and then the EXT of the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is set in the command queue. (Sc2). Then, the prohibition of timer interruption set in the step of Sc1 is released (Sc3), the command setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the transmission command setting process at the start of the game. In the command setting process, unlike the control status command batch setting process, the timer interrupt wait process is not executed after setting MODE and EXT that make up one command in the command queue, but timer interrupt is prohibited in the Sc3 step. When is released, the timer interrupt process (main) is performed at a predetermined timing at which the interrupt is subsequently performed. Therefore, the MODE and EXT set in the command queue in the Sc2 step of the command setting process are Sc3. By executing the normal command transmission process in the timer interrupt process (main) at a predetermined timing after the step, the command is transmitted to the sub control unit 91.

After the command setting process in the step of Sa4 is completed, in the transmission command setting process at the start of the game, the internal winning command setting process (second internal winning command) is executed (Sa5), and the general role is played based on the internal lottery result. The MODE and EXT of the second internal winning command that can specify the winning status are set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. After that, the command setting process is executed (Sa6), and the MODE and EXT of the predetermined area of the RAM 41c are set in the command queue. The MODE and EXT of the second internal winning command set in the command queue in the command setting process of the step of Sa6 are the timer interrupt process at a predetermined timing in which the interrupt is subsequently performed, as in the case of the command setting process in Sa4. By executing the command transmission process at the normal time in (main), the command is transmitted to the sub control unit 91.

In the step of Sa6, the command setting process corresponding to the internal winning command setting process (second internal winning command) is executed, and after the command setting process is completed, the transmission command setting process at the start of the game is terminated. After that, the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is controlled as the start operation is performed, and the control is performed according to the progress of the game.

As described above, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment executes the control state command batch setting process when the start switch 7 is operated as the first timing, that is, at the start of the game, and becomes the control state command. A plurality of included commands are transmitted to the sub-control unit 91.

Further, when transmitting a plurality of commands included in the control state command in the control state command batch setting process, the main control unit 41 sets a set of MODE and EXT to configure one command in a state where interrupts are disabled. After setting in the command queue, the timer interrupt process (main) is executed twice in succession by executing the timer interrupt process (main) that waits until the timer interrupt process (main) is performed once. By causing the sub-control unit 91 to transmit the MODE and EXT of the command queue, two sets of unit data (1 byte each of MODE and EXT) constituting one command are transmitted in succession. It has become.

Further, when the main control unit 41 transmits a plurality of commands included in the control status command in the control status command batch setting process, the main control unit 41 waits for timer interruption after setting MODE and EXT in the command queue for one command. After executing the process twice and transmitting one set of unit data, the process of setting MODE and EXT in the command queue for the other command and executing the timer interrupt wait process twice is performed. By doing so, when sending multiple commands included in the control status command, each command is set in the command queue and sent.

Further, each MODE of the plurality of commands included in the control state command is set to a continuous numerical value obtained by adding one by one from the initial value. Then, the main control unit 41 sets the value added by 1 from the initial value as the MODE of each command of the control state command when transmitting a plurality of commands included in the control state command in the control state command batch setting process. By setting in the command queue, a plurality of commands included in the control status command are transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 in the order of consecutive numerical values set as MODE.

Further, the main control unit 41 executes the control state command batch setting process in the game start transmission command setting process to transmit all the control state commands that can be uniquely set for each model of the slot machine 1, and then internally. The winning command setting process is executed to cause the sub-control unit 91 to send an internal winning command that is commonly transmitted regardless of the model of the slot machine 1, and then control is performed according to the progress of the game. Therefore, it is possible to specify that the control according to the progress of the game is started based on the transmission of the common internal winning command. On the other hand, the sub control unit 91 identifies that the main control unit 41 is subsequently controlled according to the progress of the game by receiving the common internal winning command, and controls the main control unit 41. It is possible to start the control of the corresponding production and the like.

Next, a process for the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment to transmit a predetermined command at the end of the game will be described with reference to FIG.

When the operation of the third stop is completed for the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R whose rotation control is started with the start operation of the game, the main control unit 41 is released (when the stop switch of the operation of the third stop is released). That is, at the end of the game, the game end transmission command setting process for setting the above-mentioned control state command and the command related to the game result in the command queue to be transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 is executed.

As shown in FIG. 16, in the transmission command setting process at the end of the game, first, the MODE and EXT of the door command are set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c based on the output state of the door open detection switch 25 (Sd1), and then the command is set. The process is executed (Sd2), and MODE and EXT of a predetermined area of RAM 41c are set in the command queue.

After that, the control state update process is executed (Sd3), and the corresponding control state is updated based on the end of the game and the result of the game. In the control state update process, among the control states, a combination of symbols stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, that is, a control state that can change according to the result of the game, for example, a game state or a predetermined game state is completed. The number of remaining games, the number of rights controlled by AT, etc. are updated or maintained according to the result of the game, and the control state that changes as the game is played in the predetermined state, for example, the predetermined state. The number of remaining medals until the end of the game state, the cumulative number of normal games, the number of remaining games controlled by AT, etc. are now subtracted by 1 according to the game played in the corresponding state. A control state that is maintained without being updated or subtracted and does not change regardless of the outcome of the game or the game being played in a given state, such as the winning status of the AT lottery, the stop order favorable to the player, The type of production is controlled so as to be maintained without change.

After performing the control state update process in the step of Sd3, the above-mentioned control state command batch setting process is performed (Sd4), and the control state command 1 and the control state that can specify the control state updated or maintained in the step of Sd3 are performed. Command 2 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91.

After that, the winning number set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is acquired based on the combination of the symbols aligned on the winning line LN, and the MODE and EXT of the winning number command are set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c based on the winning number. (Sd5), the command setting process is executed (Sd6), and MODE and EXT of a predetermined area of the RAM 41c are set in the command queue. After that, in the same manner as setting the winning number command in the command queue in the steps of Sd5 and Sd6, predetermined commands to be transmitted with the end of the game (for example, payout number command, game end command, payout start command, payout end). For commands, error commands, etc.), after setting MODE and EXT in the predetermined area of RAM 41c, the command setting process is executed to set MODE and EXT in the command queue. Then, after setting MODE and EXT in the command queue for all the commands to be transmitted with the end of the game, the transmission command setting process at the end of the game is terminated. After that, control is performed according to the progress of the game, such as paying out medals and setting replays according to the result of the game.

As described above, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment performs the control state command batch setting process as the second timing when the operation of the third stop for the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is completed, that is, at the end of the game. It is executed so that a plurality of commands included in the control state command are transmitted to the sub control unit 91.

Further, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment executes the control state update process in the transmission command setting process at the end of the game to update or maintain the control state that may change with the end of the game. By executing the control status command batch setting process, the control status command batch setting process sends a control status command that can specify the control status updated or maintained by the control status update process.

Further, the main control unit 41 executes the control status command batch setting process in the transmission command setting process at the end of the game to transmit all the control status commands that can be uniquely set for each model of the slot machine 1, and then wins a prize. A command that is commonly transmitted regardless of the model of the slot machine 1 such as a number command is transmitted to the sub control unit 91, and then control is performed according to the progress of the game, so that a prize is won. It is possible to specify that control according to the progress of the game is started based on the transmission of a common command such as a number command. On the other hand, the sub control unit 91 identifies that the main control unit 41 is subsequently controlled according to the progress of the game by receiving a common command, and responds to the control. It is possible to start control such as production.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment executes the control state command batch setting process in the game start transmission command setting executed at the start of one game and the game end transmission command executed at the end of one game, and the main control unit 41. A control status command including a plurality of types of commands that can specify the control status of the game on the 41 side is transmitted to the sub control unit 91. In the control status command batch setting process, each time one command included in the control status command is set in the command queue, one command set in the command queue is sent by executing the timer interrupt wait process twice. By repeating the process of setting the next one command in the command queue and sending it after the command is sent, all the commands included in the control status command are sent to the sub-control unit 91. It is designed to send to. That is, when transmitting a plurality of commands included in the control status command, after setting one command in the command queue, the timer interrupt wait process is executed until the one command is transmitted. , The process of setting the following one command in the command queue is delayed.

Further, in the control state command batch setting process of this embodiment, after setting one of the plurality of types of commands included in the game state command in the command queue, the timer interrupt process (main) is executed. It waits until one command set in the command queue is sent to the sub-control unit 91, and after one command is sent by the timer interrupt process (main), the next of the game state commands One command is set in the command queue. That is, the command of the game status command set earlier is transmitted, so that the next command of the game status commands is set for the command queue that has become free.

Further, in the control state command batch setting process, when the last command of the game state commands is transmitted, after the last command is set in the command queue, until the command is transmitted to the sub control unit 91. By waiting and sending the command, after the command queue becomes empty, the control status command batch setting process is terminated and the process moves to the next process.

In the control status command batch setting process, every time one of the multiple types of commands included in the game status command is set in the command queue, the timer interrupt wait process is executed and the timer interrupt process (main). ) Waits for one command to be sent, but after setting all the commands included in the game status command in the command queue, the timer interrupt wait process is executed for the number of set commands. , After setting all the commands included in the game status command to the command queue, a sufficient period (to send these commands) according to the number of set commands. It may be configured to wait for a period (sufficient period) for the timer interrupt processing (main) to be performed a required number of times. In such a configuration, a vacancy can be created in the command queue at the end of the control status command batch setting process.

Further, in the game start command setting process of this embodiment, every time a command is set in the command queue in the control state command batch setting process, a timer interrupt wait process is executed and the command is transmitted to the sub control unit 91. After that, the process to set the first internal winning command and the second internal winning command is performed, but all the commands included in the control status command are set in the command queue without executing the timer interrupt waiting process. After that, the first internal winning command and the second internal winning command are set in the command queue, and then only the total number of times corresponding to the total number of the control state command, the first internal winning command, and the second internal winning command. Sufficient period (of these) to send all of these commands after setting the configuration to execute timer interrupt wait processing, the control status command, the first internal winning command, and the second internal winning command in the command queue. It may be configured to wait for a period sufficient for the timer interrupt processing (main) to be performed as many times as necessary to send a command. In such a configuration, a vacancy can be created in the command queue during the waiting period after the command is set.

In the game start transmission command setting process of this embodiment, when multiple commands included in the control status command are set in the command queue and transmitted by the control status command batch setting process, each command is set in the command queue. Each time, the timer interrupt wait process is executed, and the process of waiting until each command is sent to set the next command is delayed, while the first internal winning command and the second internal winning command are placed in the command queue. When setting, the configuration is such that the timer interrupt wait process is not executed when each command is set, but when multiple commands included in the control status command are set in the command queue by the control status command batch setting process. Also, when setting the first internal winning command and the second internal winning command in the command queue, the timer interrupt wait process is executed every time each command is set, and after each command is transmitted, the next The command may be set in the command queue.

Next, the timer interrupt process (main) executed by the main control unit 41 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 17, in the timer interrupt process (main), first, the register in use is saved in the stack area (Se1). Next, a power failure determination process is performed (Se2). In the power failure determination process, it is determined whether or not the voltage decrease signal is input from the power failure detection circuit 48, and if the voltage decrease signal is input, whether or not the voltage decrease signal was input in the previous power failure determination process. If a voltage drop signal is input even in the previous power failure determination process, it is determined that the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped and a power failure has occurred, and a power failure indicating that fact is detected. The flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c.

After the power failure determination process in the step of Se2, it is determined whether or not the power failure flag is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Se3), and if the power failure flag is not set, the game controlled by the main process. Processes for performing various controls according to the progress stage (for example, processing related to counter update, processing related to switch input determination, processing related to reel motor phase signal update, processing related to command transmission, etc.) are sequentially executed. ..

In the timer interrupt process (main), as one of a plurality of processes performed in the timer interrupt process (main), a normal command transmission process for transmitting various commands set in the command queue to the sub control unit 91 is executed. (Se4). In the normal command transmission process, if at least one of MODE or EXT that configures various commands is set in the command queue, the untransmitted command queue is set based on the send pointer value of the command queue. A strobe for notifying the sub-control unit 91 that the MODE or EXT is output after the specified MODE or EXT is specified from the command output port by specifying the first set of the MODE or EXT. The signal is output for a predetermined time (10 μs in this embodiment). Then, after updating the transmission pointer value to a value indicating the next untransmitted MODE or EXT, the command output port is initialized, and the normal command transmission process is terminated. As a result, each time the timer interrupt process (main) is performed, the MODE and EXT set in the command queue are transmitted byte by byte to the sub-control unit 91, and the untransmitted data left in the command queue is transmitted. MODE and EXT will be transmitted in the timer interrupt process (main) from the next time onward.

In the normal command transmission process, if no MODE or EXT that configures various commands is set in the command queue, no MODE, EXT, or strobe signal is output from the command output port, and the command is commanded. All you have to do is initialize the output port. As a result, the command output port is initially set regardless of whether or not the command is set in the command queue, that is, whether or not the command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 by performing the command transmission process during normal operation. The command output port is initialized from the time when the normal command transmission process is performed until the next normal command transmission process is performed.

Then, in the timer interrupt process (main), after all the plurality of processes performed in the timer interrupt process (main) are completed, the registers saved in the stack area in the step of Se1 are restored, and the process is terminated. Then, the process returns to the process in the main process before the timer interrupt process (main) is executed.

Further, in the step of Se3, it is determined whether or not the power cut flag is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and if it is determined that the power cut flag is set, it is set in the command queue before the power cut process. The command transmission process at the time of power failure to transmit all the untransmitted MODEs and EXTs to the sub-control unit 91 is executed (Se6).

In the command transmission process at the time of power failure, the first set of untransmitted MODE or EXT is specified based on the transmission pointer value of the command queue, and the specified MODE or EXT is output from the output port. The process of outputting the strobe signal and updating the transmission pointer value to the value indicating the next untransmitted MODE or EXT is repeated, and it is not set in the command queue when a power failure is detected in the power failure determination process. All MODE and EXT of transmission are sequentially transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 byte by byte.

Then, after all the untransmitted MODEs and EXTs set in the command queue are transmitted by the command transmission process at the time of power interruption in the step of Se6, the power interruption process (main) is executed and the slot machine 1 is executed. When the power supply to the power supply is resumed, a process is performed to enable the control state before the power failure to be restored, and the subsequent process such as control related to the game is disabled by the main control unit 41.

As described above, in the timer interrupt process (main), the main control unit 41 executes the command transmission process during normal operation when the power failure is not detected, while the main control unit 41 executes the command transmission process when the power failure is detected. The interrupt command transmission process is executed, and the MODE and EXT constituting the command set in the command queue are transmitted to the sub-control unit 91.

Further, in the normal command transmission process, only one MODE or EXT initially set in the command queue is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, and the untransmitted MODE and EXT are timer interrupt processes from the next time onward. In contrast to the transmission in the main), in the command transmission process at the time of power interruption, all the untransmitted MODEs and EXTs stored in the command queue are transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, and the untransmitted MODEs and EXTs are transmitted. Is designed not to remain.

As described above, in the timer interrupt process (main) of this embodiment, the command transmission process during normal operation is performed each time the timer interrupt process (main) is performed, and among the commands set in the command queue. One byte of information (MODE or EXT) of one command set at the beginning is transmitted to the sub control unit 91, and the timer interrupt process (main) is performed twice. A set of information (MODE and EXT) constituting one command is transmitted.

Further, in the normal command transmission process executed in the timer interrupt process (main), if at least one MODE or EXT is set in the command queue, it is set first among the set commands. The MODE or EXT of one command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, and then the command output port of the parallel output ports 513 is initialized to end the normal command transmission process. Further, in the normal command transmission process, if no MODE or EXT is set in the command queue, the command output port is initialized and then the normal command transmission process is terminated. That is, in the normal command transmission process, the command output port is initially set when the normal command transmission process is terminated, regardless of whether or not the information (MODE or EXT) constituting the command is set in the command queue. It has become. As a result, after the MODE and EXT constituting the command are transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 in the normal command transmission process of the timer interrupt process (main), the normal timer interrupt process (main) is performed. When the command output port is initialized for the period until the command transmission process is performed, that is, the MODE and EXT are not left in the command output port after the MODE and EXT are transmitted. It has become.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 can control the game and can transmit a plurality of commands including a control state command indicating the control state of the game. The sub control unit 91 can specify the control state on the main control unit 41 side in response to the reception of a command from the main control unit 41 and control the effect.

In such a configuration, in order for the sub control unit 91 to grasp the control state on the main control unit 41 side in detail, the control state showing the control state changed each time the control state changes on the main control unit 41 side. Is configured to transmit each time, there is a problem that the program capacity related to the transmission of the command by the main control unit 41 increases.

On the other hand, in the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment, when the start switch 7 is operated as the first timing in the game of one unit, that is, at the start of the game and the reel 2L as the second timing. Sub-control of control status commands including a plurality of types of commands that can specify the control status of the game on the main control unit 41 side when the third stop operation for 2C and 2R is completed, that is, at the end of the game. The control state command that can be transmitted to the unit 91 includes a control state that does not change between the first timing and the second timing, that is, a control state that does not change at a plurality of timings in one unit of the game. The control state command 2 as the identifiable first control state command and the control state that can change between the first timing and the second timing, that is, the control that may change at a plurality of timings in one unit of the game. The control state command 1 as a second control state command capable of specifying the state is included, and the main control unit 41 performs a common control state command batch setting process in both the first timing and the second timing. By executing, all the commands included in the control status command are transmitted, so that the sub control unit 91 side can grasp the control status on the main control unit 41 side in detail based on the control status command, and the main control can be performed. It is possible to reduce the program capacity for processing when the unit 41 sends a control state command.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 that controls the game as the first control means can send a command to the sub control unit 91 that controls the effect as the second control means. However, the first control means is a control means for transmitting control information such as a command to the second control means, and the second control means is based on the control information transmitted from the first control means. Any control means may be used, and as the first control means, a control other than the control of the game, for example, a control means for controlling the effect is applied, and as the second control means, for example, the first When the control means is a control means for controlling the effect, the control means for controlling the effect device based on the control information transmitted from the first control means may be applied.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 executes a common control state command batch setting process at the start of the game as the first timing and at the end of the game as the second timing. Although the configuration is such that the control state command is transmitted at a plurality of timings in the 1-unit game, the main control unit 41 causes the control state command to be transmitted at a plurality of timings including the timing before and after the control state changes in at least the 1-unit game. Any configuration may be used, and a configuration may include a plurality of timings other than the start and end of the game, a configuration including the start and end of the game, and other timings, and a plurality of three or more. The configuration may include timing. With such a configuration, the sub-control unit 91 can be made to grasp in more detail that the control state has changed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the AT control is applied as an advantageous state advantageous to the player, which is one type of the control state, but is controlled by another control, for example, the AT as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. The probability of winning the lottery to decide whether or not to grant the right is higher than other states, the probability of winning the lottery to decide whether to add the number of games controlled by AT is another Apply the advantageous state that is higher than the state, the advantageous state that the probability that the re-game combination is won in the internal lottery is higher than the other states, and the advantageous state that the probability that the small role is won in the internal lottery is higher than the other states. Even in such a configuration, the control state related to each advantageous state may be transmitted from the main control unit 41 to the sub control unit 91 as a plurality of commands included in the control state command. The control unit 91 can be made to grasp the control state on the main control unit 41 side in detail.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment executes the control state command batch setting process at the first timing and the second timing in the one-unit game, and transmits the control state commands at a plurality of timings in the one-unit game. The first timing is the timing when the start switch 7 is operated, that is, the timing accompanying the start of the game, and the second timing is the operation of the third stop for the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. When the game is terminated, that is, the timing is associated with the end of the game, the sub-control unit 91, which is the second control means, controls the control state of the main control unit 41, which is the first control means, at the beginning and end of the game. It can be grasped.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 executes the control state command batch setting process when the start switch 7 is operated as the first timing that accompanies the start of the game, and is in the control state. Although it is configured to send a command, the first timing may be the start of the game, and the first timing is the timing at which the rotation control of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is started with the start of the game. , The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are in a constant speed state with the start of the game, the timing when the acceptance of the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is enabled, and the internal lottery won with the start of the game. Timing such as the timing after sending the internal winning command that can specify the situation may be applied.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 presses the stop switch for the third stop when the third stop operation for the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is completed as the second timing accompanying the end of the game. After that, when the game is released), the control status command batch setting process is executed and the control status command is sent. However, the second timing may be the end of the game, and the second timing. As a result, the timing at which the rotation control of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is started with the start of the game, and the timing at which the third stop operation is started for the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R with the start of the game (third). (When the stop switch for stop is pressed), the timing at which the stop control of all reels 2L, 2C, and 2R ends with the end of the game, and the stop state of all reels 2L, 2C, and 2R with the end of the game. Timing, timing between the operation of the third stop of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R and the start operation of the next game (for example, the timing of payout, the setting of replay, or the number of bets). Timing such as) may be applied.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can be controlled by the AT as an advantageous state advantageous to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the first timing and the second timing in one unit of the game. A common control status command batch setting process is executed at the timing, and the control status command can be transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. The control status command includes the first timing and the second timing. A control state command 1 capable of specifying a control state that can be changed in The AT-related command A that can specify the control state that does not change for each game except the state controlled by the AT is included, and the common control state command batch setting process is executed for the AT-related command A as well. By doing so, since it is transmitted as a plurality of types of commands included in the control state command, the control state of the main control unit 41 as the first control means can be grasped in detail on the sub control unit 91 side as the second control means. At the same time, it is possible to reduce the program capacity when the main control unit 41 as the first control means transmits a control state command.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment includes a plurality of types of commands capable of specifying a control state by executing a common control state command batch setting process at the first timing and the second timing in one unit of the game. The control status command can be transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, and each command included in the control status command is data constituting the command and is a MODE indicating the classification of the command, and is a continuous number for each type. Is attached, and the main control unit 41 commands each command included in the control status command in the order of consecutive numbers assigned as MODE in the control status command batch setting process executed at one timing. Since it is set in the queue and transmitted, it is possible to grasp whether the order in which the control status commands are transmitted is normal on the sub-control unit 91 side as the second control means.

In the control state command batch setting process, the main control unit 41 of this embodiment performs 1 addition process each time each command is transmitted from the initial value or the initial value when transmitting each command included in the control state command. Since the obtained value is set as the MODE that composes the command, it does not require relatively large data such as a data table to create multiple types of control state commands, and only the initial value and the value for addition are used. Therefore, the data capacity for creating the control state command can be reduced. Further, in such a configuration, generally, in the design of the slot machine 1, the number of types of control states to be grasped by the sub control unit 91 increases or decreases depending on the model of the slot machine 1, etc. Regardless of the number of types, each command included in the control status command can be created using only the initial value and the addition value in the control status command batch setting process.

The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control unit 41 that controls the game and a sub control unit 91 that produces an effect based on a command transmitted from the main control unit 41, and the main control unit 41 is stepwise. It is configured to execute the main process that shifts to the main process and the timer interrupt process (main) that interrupts the main process and executes the interrupt process at regular intervals. In the main process, a command is generated, set in the command queue, and the timer is executed. In the interrupt process (main), the command transmission process during normal operation is executed and the command set in the command queue is transmitted to the sub control unit 91. The main control unit 41 has a plurality of commands in the main process. When commands are continuously set in the command queue, for example, when multiple types of control status commands are set in the command queue in the control status command batch setting process, they are set in the command queue during the setting of multiple commands. The configuration is such that the progress of the main process is delayed by executing the timer interrupt wait process that waits until the timer interrupt process (main) in which the normal command transmission process is performed to send the command.

In such a configuration, when multiple commands are continuously set in the command queue in the main process, the timer interrupt wait process is executed every time each command is set, that is, while these commands are set in the command queue. , The progress of the main process set by the next command is delayed until the command set in the command queue is sent, so the command queue for setting the next command without increasing the capacity of the command queue. Can be left empty, preventing the command queue from overflowing.

In this embodiment, when the main control unit 41 continuously sets a plurality of types of control status commands in the command queue by executing the control status command batch setting process, each command is set in the command queue. In the configuration that executes the timer interrupt wait process, that is, the timer interrupt wait process is executed during the setting of multiple commands until the command set in the command queue is transmitted by the timer interrupt process (main). The configuration is such that the progress of the main process is delayed for a predetermined period (1.12 ms (0.56 × 2 ms) in which the timer interrupt process (main) is performed twice in this embodiment), but a plurality of commands are used. During the setting, at least one command set in the command queue may be configured to delay the main process for a predetermined period required for transmission by the timer interrupt process (main), and one command is transmitted. The main process may be delayed for a period (1.12 ms) or more required for this purpose.

Further, in this embodiment, when the main control unit 41 continuously sets a plurality of types of control status commands in the command queue by executing the control status command batch setting process, each time each command is set in the command queue. The configuration that executes the timer interrupt wait process, that is, the timer interrupt wait process is executed during the setting of multiple commands, and the main command is sent until the command set in the command queue is transmitted by the timer interrupt process (main). Although it is configured to delay the progress of processing, the timing to delay the progress of main processing is when multiple commands are set in the command queue, and after all of the plurality of commands are set in the command queue. May be.

For example, in the control state command batch setting process for sending multiple types of commands, after all the commands included in the game state command are set in succession in the command queue, all the commands set in the command queue are interrupted by the timer. Since one command is transmitted by two timer interruptions performed at intervals of 0.56 ms for a predetermined period for transmission by (main) (for example, in this embodiment, 10 commands are used as game state commands. When it is included and set in the command queue, it may be configured to perform delay control for delaying the main process for 11.2 ms (0.56 × 2 × 10 ms) or more. In such a configuration, after all the control status commands set in the command queue have been sent in succession, and the command queue is free, the subsequent main processing is advanced and the next command is set. Since it is possible to perform the processing to be performed, it is possible to prevent the command queue from overflowing without increasing the capacity of the command queue.

Further, for example, in the control state command batch setting process, each time each command included in the game state command is set in the command queue, a predetermined period (for example,) until the command is transmitted by the timer interrupt process (main). Perform the first delay process to delay the main process of setting the next command over 1.12 ms (0.56 x 2 ms)) required to send one command by the timer interrupt process (main). , And after setting all the commands included in the game status command in the command queue, the predetermined period (for example, control status command) until the command set in the command queue is transmitted by the timer interrupt process (main). A configuration in which the second delay processing is performed for a period corresponding to the number of commands set by the next main processing of the batch setting processing (a period of 1.12 ms or more required to send at least one command). But it's okay. In such a configuration, the first delay processing is performed each time each command included in the control state command is set in the command queue, and after all the commands included in the control state command are set in the command queue. Furthermore, by performing the second delay processing, it is possible to proceed with the subsequent main processing and perform processing for setting the next command, etc., while the command queue is surely free, so that the command queue can be performed. You can prevent the command queue from overflowing without increasing the capacity of.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 continuously performs a plurality of types of commands included in the control state commands as a plurality of commands by executing the control state command batch setting process at the start of the game or the end of the game. When setting to the command queue, the timer interrupt wait process is executed each time each command is set to the command queue, so that the main process for setting the next command to the command queue is delayed. However, the plurality of commands are not limited to the control state command, and may be configured to apply another command group. For example, at the start of the game, the control state command, the first internal winning command, the second internal winning command, and the push order may be applied. In a configuration in which a plurality of commands including commands are transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, even when the commands included in the control status commands are set in the command queue and transmitted, the first internal winning command and the second internal winning command are transmitted. , Even when the push order command is set in the command queue and sent, the process of waiting for timer interruption may be executed while each command is being sent to delay the process of setting the next command. Even in such a configuration, as in the configuration of this embodiment, the progress of the main process for setting the next command is delayed, so that the next command can be set without increasing the capacity of the command queue. The command queue can be left empty to prevent the command queue from overflowing.

Also, when sending multiple commands regardless of the type of command, the progress of the main process for setting the next command is in progress while setting the command in the command queue or after setting all the commands in the command queue. In the delayed configuration, the progress of the main process for setting the next command is delayed so that the command queue for setting the next command is free, so the command queue is used when sending the next command. It is not necessary to perform a process of determining whether or not there is a vacancy and changing the timing for setting a command according to the determination result, and the process of setting the next command can be simplified.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment includes a parallel output port 513 including a command output port for transmitting a command to the sub control unit 91, and executes a normal command transmission process in the timer interrupt process (main). By initializing the command output port that outputs the command among the parallel output ports 513 each time, the period from the end of the timer interrupt process (main) to the execution of the next timer interrupt process (main). The configuration is such that the command output port is initialized over. In such a configuration, command output that outputs a command for a period from the end of the timer interrupt process (main) to the execution of the next timer interrupt process (main) without outputting the command. By setting the port to the initialized state, for example, a command can be identified by an unauthorized board connected from the outside to the command line from the command output port of the main control unit 41 to the command input port of the sub control unit 91. It is possible to prevent it from being interrupted.

In such a configuration, the command output port is initialized every time the command transmission process is executed during normal operation in the timer interrupt process (main), so noise other than the command, invalid signals, etc. are generated in the command output port. Even if it occurs, noise etc. can be cleared by executing the next normal command transmission process, and the influence of noise etc. can be affected within a certain period (normal time after the normal command transmission process is executed). It can be suppressed to the period until the command transmission process is executed).

In this embodiment, the command output port is initialized every time the command transmission process is executed in the timer interrupt process (main), but the command output port is initialized in the timer interrupt process (main). A configuration in which the command output port is initialized at the timing of performing processing other than the command transmission processing, for example, a configuration in which the command output port is initialized when the timer interrupt processing (main) is terminated may be used, or the timer interrupt processing may be performed. A configuration that initializes the command output port in the main process while (main) is executed, for example, after setting a command in the command queue in the main process, a timer interrupt in which at least one command is transmitted The command output port may be initialized when the time required for the command to be executed) has elapsed. Even with these configurations, it is possible to prevent the command from being specified by an unauthorized board or the like connected to the command line from the outside during the period when the command is not output.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment includes a parallel output port 513 including a command output port for transmitting a command to the sub control unit 91, and executes a normal command transmission process in the timer interrupt process (main). When the command is not set in the command queue and the command is not transmitted in the normal command transmission process, the command output port of the parallel output ports 513 is initialized. In such a configuration, the command output port is initialized in the timer interrupt process (main) in which no command is output, so that the timer interrupt process (main) is performed and then the next timer interrupt process is performed. For a period in which the command is not output until the process (main) is executed, the command output port that outputs the command should be initialized, for example, externally connected to the command line from the outside. It is possible to prevent the command from being specified by an unauthorized board connected from.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 can control the game and can transmit a plurality of commands including a control state command indicating the control state of the game. The sub control unit 91 has a configuration capable of specifying a control state on the main control unit 41 side in response to receiving a command from the main control unit 41 and controlling the effect, and the main control unit 41 has a configuration capable of controlling the effect. , A command is generated according to the progress of the game and stored in the command queue, and the command stored in the command queue is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 in the normal command transmission process that is periodically executed by interrupting the timer. It is a configuration to do.

In such a configuration, for example, in order for the sub control unit 91 to grasp the control state on the main control unit 41 side in detail, a control state that changes each time the control state changes on the main control unit 41 side is shown. If you try to send multiple types of control status commands each time, multiple commands will be centrally generated in a short period of time, and there is a risk that all commands will not be able to be sent due to the overflow of the command queue.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, one command transmitted by the main control unit 41 is composed of a 1-byte MODE and a 1-byte EXT, and the main control unit 41 commands according to the progress of the game. MODE and EXT are created and set in the command queue, and after that, every time the timer interrupt process (main) is executed periodically, the MODE and EXT set in the command queue are sub-controlled by 1 byte. In the control status command batch setting process for transmitting a plurality of types of commands included in the control status command to the sub-control unit 91, one command included in the control status command is transmitted. After creating the MODE and EXT of the command and setting it in the command queue, the command queue can be entered by executing the interrupt wait process that waits until the timer interrupt process (main) is executed twice. By waiting for the progress of control for the period required for the MODE and EXT of the set command to be transmitted, the MOED and EXT of the command are newly transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. In order to prevent another command from being set in the command queue, the command queue will not overflow due to the newly created commands MODE and EXT, and the control status command will be sent to the sub-control unit 91. It can be transmitted reliably.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 that controls the game as the first control means can send a command to the sub control unit 91 that controls the effect as the second control means. However, the first control means is a control means for transmitting control information such as a command to the second control means, and the second control means is based on the control information transmitted from the first control means. Any control means may be used, and as the first control means, a control other than the control of the game, for example, a control means for controlling the effect is applied, and as the second control means, for example, the first When the control means is a control means for controlling the effect, the control means for controlling the effect device based on the control information transmitted from the first control means may be applied.

Further, in this embodiment, the main control unit 41 periodically executes the timer interrupt process (main) and transmits MODE and EXT set in the command queue to the sub control unit 91 byte by byte. However, if the data such as MODE and EXT set in the command queue are transmitted at predetermined intervals, they are transmitted by a program (software) such as interrupt processing by the main control unit 41. It may be configured, or it may be configured to provide a control means such as a transmission circuit other than the main control unit 41 and transmit the data set in the command queue by the control means (software) at predetermined intervals.

Further, in this embodiment, the main control unit 41 is a command included in the control state command in the control state command batch setting process for transmitting a plurality of types of commands included in the control state command to the sub control unit 91. Is set in the command queue and then the interrupt wait process is executed twice, so that the progress of control is waited for the period required for the MODE and EXT set in the command queue to be transmitted. After setting the command included in the command in the command queue, the configuration may be such that the progress of control is waited for a period longer than a predetermined period required for the MODE and EXT set in the command queue to be transmitted, for example. By executing the interrupt wait process three times or more, a configuration that waits for the progress of control for a predetermined period or longer, and a timer that measures the elapsed time after setting one command in the command queue are provided. When the time required for the timer interrupt process (main) to be performed twice by the timer is timed, a new command is set in the command queue. It is possible to wait for the progress of control for a period longer than a predetermined period required for the command to be transmitted.

In this embodiment, the command transmitted by the main control unit 41 is a 2-byte command composed of MODE and EXT, and in the timer interrupt process (main), MODE and EXT set in the command queue are set to 1. The configuration is such that bytes are transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, but in the timer interrupt processing (main), the commands set in the command queue at predetermined cycles are less than the total capacity of the data constituting the commands. In the configuration in which the capacity is transmitted to the sub control unit 91 as the second control means, the main control unit 41 as the first control means sets all the data constituting the command in the command queue and then sets the timer. The interrupt process (main) may be configured to wait for the progress of control for a period required for all the data constituting one command to be transmitted. Even in such a configuration, the configuration of the present embodiment may be used. Can produce the same effect as.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment determines whether or not the power supply to the slot mine 1 is stopped each time the timer interrupt process (main) is executed, and the power supply to the slot mine 1 is stopped. If it is determined that the command is to be executed, the configuration is such that the progress of the control of the game is disabled, and it is determined that the power supply to the slot mine 1 is not stopped every time the timer interrupt process (main) is executed. In the normal time command transmission process, one of MODE and EXT constituting the command set in the command queue is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 as the second control means, and the slot mine is executed. When it is determined that the power supply to 1 is stopped, the command transmission process at the time of power failure is executed before the progress of the control of the game is disabled without executing the command transmission process at the normal time. Since all MODEs and EXTs set in the command queue are transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, the progress of control of the game is not disabled during the transmission of the MODEs and EXTs constituting the command. Further, even if the power supply to the slot mine 1 is stopped after a part of MODE and EXT that compose one command stored in the command queue is transmitted, one command is configured. All MODE and EXT can be transmitted.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment executes a command setting process to form a command at the first transmission trigger for transmitting one command other than the control state command such as an internal winning command or a door coma and. In the second transmission trigger that sets EXT in the command queue and sends multiple types of commands included in the control status command, MODE and EXT that configure the command by executing the control status command batch setting process are set in the command queue. In the control status command batch setting process, which is the configuration to be set and is the second transmission trigger, the timer interrupt process (main) is executed after setting MODE and EXT constituting one command in the command queue. Since the interrupt wait process is executed to wait for the progress of control of the game, the command queue overflows even if MODE and EXT that configure multiple commands are set in the command queue in a short period of time. Can be prevented.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment has a configuration in which MODE and EXT constituting the commands set in the command queue in the timer interruption process (main) are transmitted byte by byte, and in the control state command batch setting process. , After setting a set of MODE and EXT that make up one command included in the control status command in the command queue, the interrupt wait process that waits until the timer interrupt process (main) is executed once is performed twice. By executing it, the progress of control of the game is made to wait for the period required for one set of MODE and EXT constituting one command to be transmitted, so that it is also used in other processes other than the control state command batch setting process. By executing the common interrupt wait process multiple times, the progress of the game control is made to wait, so that the program capacity related to the wait can be reduced.

Further, in the timer interrupt process (main), the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment transmits MODE and EXT, which constitute a command set in the command queue in the timer interrupt process (main), byte by byte. , The output status of switches such as the start switch 7 and the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is updated, the output status of the corresponding switch is referred to in the subsequent main processing, and the progress of the game is controlled based on the output status. In the configuration, when controlling the progress of the game in the main process, refer to the output status of each switch after executing the interrupt wait process that waits until the timer interrupt process (main) is executed once. In the control state command batch setting process to be executed in the main process, a set of MODE and EXT constituting one command included in the control state command is set in the command queue, and then the timer interrupt process (main) is performed. ) Waits until it is executed once. By executing the interrupt wait process twice, the progress of control of the game is made to wait for the period required for one set of MODE and EXT constituting one command to be transmitted. Therefore, by executing the common interrupt wait process that is also used in the process of detecting the operation of switches as a process other than the control status command batch setting process multiple times, the progress of the game control is made to wait. The program capacity related to can be reduced.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment configures one command included in the control state command in a state where the timer interrupt is set to be disabled after the timer interrupt is set to be disabled in the control status command batch setting process. By setting MODE and EXT in the command queue, then executing the timer interrupt wait process and executing the timer interrupt process (main), the MODE and EXT that make up one command are set in the command queue. It is possible to prevent the command from being sent before the processing is completed.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment can specify the winning status of the first internal winning command and the general winning combination, which can specify the winning status of the special combination as the internal lottery result, as the internal winning command capable of specifying the internal lottery result. The second internal winning command can be set in the internal winning command setting process, and the command can be transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. In the internal winning command setting process, regardless of whether or not it is controlled by the AT, when the internal lottery result becomes the notification target combination, it can be specified that the notification target combination has been won, but the stop is advantageous for the player. The second internal winning command related to the general combination is set so that the order cannot be specified. Therefore, regardless of whether or not the main control unit 41 controls the AT, the second internal winning command does not specify an advantageous stop order for the player according to the internal lottery result, and the AT controls the command. Since the common second internal winning command is transmitted regardless of whether or not it has been executed, the processing related to the transmission of the second internal winning command can be simplified, and even if the sub-control unit 91 side is fraudulent, the AT It is possible to prevent the stop order, which is advantageous for the player, from being notified by the navigation effect in a state where the control is not controlled.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to notify the stop order of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, which is advantageous for the player, by the navigation notification according to the notification target combination won by the internal winning. The control unit 41 is based on a combination of an operation mode of operating at one of a plurality of different operation timings and an operation mode of operating at any one of a plurality of operation orders by navigation notification. The operation mode may be notified by navigation notification, and even in such a configuration, the main control unit 41 may be notified by the main control unit 41 regardless of whether or not the main control unit 41 controls the AT. Although it is possible to specify that the player has won, by setting the second internal winning command so that the operation mode that is advantageous to the player cannot be specified, the player can use the second internal winning command according to the internal lottery result. An advantageous operation mode is not specified on the sub-control unit 91 side.

Further, in this embodiment, the main control unit 41 includes the first notification target combination and the second notification target combination as the notification target combination for executing the navigation notification, and the main control unit 41 sets the internal winning command. In the process, when the internal lottery result becomes the notification target combination, the second internal winning command is issued so that it can be specified whether the notification target combination is the first notification target combination or the second notification target combination. Since it is set and transmitted to the sub control unit 91, when the internal lottery result becomes the notification target combination, whether the notification target combination is the first notification target combination on the sub control unit 91 side or the second notification target combination. It is possible to specify whether or not it is a notification target combination, and the sub-control unit 91 can also perform different effects depending on the type of the notification target combination.

Further, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment controls the AT at the start of the game, and when the internal lottery result becomes the notification target combination in the state where the navigation notification is executed, the player can use it. A stop order data setting process for setting stop order data that can specify an advantageous stop order in a predetermined area of the RAM 91c is executed, and a command including the stop order data is set in the above-mentioned game start transmission command setting process for sub-control. Since the data is transmitted to the unit 91, the sub-control unit 91 can perform a navigation effect to notify the stop order advantageous to the player in the state where the navigation notification is executed.

Further, in this embodiment, the main control unit 41 includes the first notification target combination and the second notification target combination as the notification target combination for executing the navigation notification, and the main control unit 41 performs the stop order data setting process. In the internal lottery result when the navigation notification is executed and the internal lottery result becomes the first notification target combination or the second notification target combination, that is, in the state where the navigation notification is executed. Even if the notification target combinations won by lottery are of different types, if the stop order that is advantageous to the player is common, the stop order data including the common navigation number that can specify the stop order that is advantageous to the player is provided. Since it is set, the types of stop order data can be reduced.

Further, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment sets stop order data in a predetermined area of the RAM 91c, which can specify a stop order advantageous to the player according to the control status of the game at the start of the game. In the state where the processing is executed and the navigation notification is executed in the stop order data setting process, the stop order data that can specify the stop order advantageous to the player is set when the internal lottery result becomes the notification target combination. On the other hand, in a state other than the state in which the navigation notification is executed, when the internal lottery result becomes the notification target combination, the stop order advantageous to the player cannot be specified, but the standard push order (for example, the first stop on the left). ) Is set, so the process of setting the stop order data is common when the internal lottery result becomes the notification target, regardless of whether or not the navigation notification is executed. Can be transformed into.

Further, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment has a configuration in which the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped stepwise each time the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated, which is advantageous for the player. The order is determined before the operation of all the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, that is, the operation of the third stop is completed, and the main control unit 41 has a stop order that is advantageous to the player. When it is confirmed, the push order specification command setting process for setting the push order specification command capable of specifying the confirmed advantageous stop order is executed, and the set push order specification command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. In the push order specific command setting process, when the internal lottery result becomes the notification target combination in a state other than the state in which the navigation notification is executed, the stop order advantageous to the player is determined, that is, the first stop, the first stop. 2 After the stop operation is performed, a push order specification command that can specify a stop order that is advantageous to the player according to the internal winning result is set and transmitted, so that the sub-control unit 91 is fraudulent. While preventing the player from specifying the stop order that is advantageous to the player, whether or not the sub-control unit 91 is operated in the stop order that is advantageous to the player when the internal lottery result becomes the notification target combination. It is possible to produce according to the situation.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 stops the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R when the notification target combination is won in a state other than the state in which the navigation notification is executed in the push order specifying command setting process. When it is determined that the operation is performed and the combination to be stopped is determined, a push order specifying command capable of specifying a stop order advantageous to the player is set, and the push order specifying command is sent to the sub-control unit 91. Although it is configured to transmit, the command that can specify the stop order that is advantageous to the player after the stop operation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is performed and the winning combination to be stopped is determined is different from the push order specification command. It may be a command, for example, by transmitting another command that can specify the type of the notification target combination won in the internal lottery, the stop order advantageous to the player based on the type of the notification target combination won. It may be a configuration that makes it possible to specify, or a configuration that provides a separate command that can specify a stop order that is advantageous to the player. In such a configuration, the main control unit 41 is configured to perform a process of setting a command capable of specifying a stop order advantageous to the player when the winning combination to be stopped is determined. It is possible to reduce the load related to the transmission of a separate command or the like that can specify the stop order that is advantageous to the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 executes the stop order data setting process when the internal lottery is performed and the stop operations of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are performed, and the player It is configured to send a command including stop order data that can specify a stop order that is advantageous to the sub-control unit 91, and after the winning combination to be stopped is determined, each time the push order specification command setting process is executed, A push order specifying command that can specify a stop order that is advantageous to the player is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, but a push order that can specify a stop order that is advantageous to the player after the winning combination to be stopped is determined. The specific command may be configured to be transmitted at least once when the winning combination to be stopped is determined, and after the combination to be stopped is determined and the push order specifying command capable of specifying the stopping order advantageous to the player is transmitted. May be configured not to execute the push order specific command setting process. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the load related to the transmission of the push order specifying command by the main control unit 41.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 executes the stop order data setting process when the internal lottery is performed in the state of performing the navigation notification, and the stop operations of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are performed. When, the push order specific command setting process is executed, but when the navigation notification is performed, only the stop order data setting process is executed when the internal lottery is performed. May be. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the load related to the transmission of the push order specifying command by the main control unit 41 when the navigation notification is performed.

When the start operation is performed, the main control unit 41 of this embodiment performs an internal lottery, sets a different winning number for each internal lottery result according to the internal lottery result in the RAM 41c, and sets the winning number. It is possible to specify the winning status of the special role as an internal winning command that can specify the internal lottery result while setting the internal winning flag, navigating notification, command creation, stopping control of reels 2L, 2C, 2R, etc. The first internal winning command and the second internal winning command that can specify the winning status of the general winning combination are set in the internal winning command setting process, and the set command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 internally. As a winning number when the notification target combination is won as a winning result, a continuous numerical value consisting of a predetermined numerical range is assigned, and in the internal winning command setting process, the state is controlled by the AT and the navigation notification is executed. In a state other than the above, when the winning number set in the RAM 41c is within the predetermined numerical range, it is possible to specify that the winning combination has become the notification target, but the stop order advantageous to the player cannot be specified. Is set, and the set second internal winning command is transmitted to the sub control unit 91. As a result, regardless of whether or not the main control unit 41 controls the AT, the second internal winning command does not specify an advantageous stop order for the player according to the internal lottery result, so that the sub Even if the control unit 91 is fraudulent, it is possible to prevent the player from being notified of the stop order advantageous to the player by the navigation effect without being controlled by the AT.

Further, as the winning number set when the internal lottery result becomes the notification target combination, a continuous numerical value consisting of a predetermined numerical range is assigned, and the main control unit 41 determines whether or not the internal lottery result is the notification target combination. Processing when transmitting the second internal winning command by determining whether or not the winning number used when performing the predetermined control is within the predetermined numerical range assigned to the notification target combination. Can be simplified.

Further, in this embodiment, the main control unit 41 includes the first notification target combination and the first notification target combination as the notification target combination for executing the navigation notification, and the internal lottery result is the first notification target. A continuous numerical value in the first numerical range is assigned as a winning number when a winning combination is made, and a continuous numerical value in a second numerical range is assigned as a winning number when the internal lottery result becomes the second notification target winning combination. When the internal lottery result becomes the notification target combination, the main control unit 41 determines that the internal lottery result is in the first numerical range or the second numerical range. By determining whether it is the first notification target combination or the second notification target combination, it is possible to simplify the process of setting the second internal winning command in the internal winning command setting process.

Further, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can control a plurality of gaming states including the first state and the second state, and the notification target combination determined in the internal lottery in each gaming state. When the types are different, the winning number when the internal lottery result becomes the notification target combination in the first state of the game state, and the internal lottery result becomes the notification target combination in the second state of the game state. By assigning the winning numbers to a common numerical range, whether the internal lottery result is the notification target in both the first state and the second state in the internal winning command setting process. It is possible to standardize the process for determining whether or not.

Further, in the internal winning command setting process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment responds to the internal lottery result when the internal lottery result is a combination other than the notification target combination or a loss in the state of not being controlled by the AT. When the second internal winning command including the winning number is set and the internal lottery result is the notification target combination, the one winning number included in the first numerical range is included and the internal lottery result is the notification target combination. By setting a second internal winning command including one winning number included in the second numerical range, the internal lottery result is a notification target combination even if it is a notification target combination in a state where it is not controlled by the AT. Since it is possible to send the second internal winning command including the winning number corresponding to the internal lottery result even if the winning combination is other than the winning combination or the winning combination, the internal lottery result may or may not be the notification target combination. The process of creating and transmitting the second internal winning command can be standardized.

In addition, when the state is not controlled by the AT, when the internal lottery result becomes the notification target combination, it can be specified that the notification target combination has been won, but the stop order advantageous to the player cannot be specified. While setting the second internal winning command related to the general combination, when the AT is in a controlled state, when the internal lottery result becomes the notification target combination, it depends on the type of the notification target combination won. By setting a second internal winning command including the winning number, when the AT is in a controlled state, a second internal winning command that can specify the type of the winning notification target combination is sent to the sub-control unit 91. It may be configured to transmit. In such a configuration, in the state controlled by the AT, the stop order advantageous to the player according to the type of the notification target combination can be specified from the winning number included in the second internal winning command, so that the sub-control The stop order advantageous to the player can be notified on the unit 91 side by the navigation effect. Further, in such a configuration, in the state controlled by the AT, the winning number of the lottery target combination in the internal lottery can be specified from the winning number included in the second internal winning command. It is possible to produce according to the type of winning combination included.

Further, in such a configuration, the main control unit 41 may not execute the stop order data setting process and may not transmit a command including stop order data capable of specifying an advantageous stop order advantageous to the player. With such a configuration, in the state controlled by the AT, the stop order advantageous to the player can be specified from the winning number included in the second internal winning command according to the type of the notification target combination. The sub-control unit 91 can notify the player of the advantageous stop order by the navigation effect, and the main control unit 41 can transmit a command including stop order data capable of specifying the advantageous stop order for the player. The load can be reduced.

If the winning number of the first notification target combination and the winning number of the second notification target combination are set in a continuous numerical range, the winning number of the first notification target combination is used. The first numerical range to be set and the second numerical range in which the winning number of the second notification target combination is set may be continuous. Even with such a configuration, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not the internal lottery result is the notification target combination, and the winning number used when performing the predetermined control is assigned to the notification target combination. Since it can be determined based on whether or not it is within the numerical range of, it is possible to simplify the process of transmitting the second internal winning command.

Further, in the internal winning command setting process, the group of notification target combinations for which the same transmission winning number is set is at least when the internal lottery result becomes the notification target combination regardless of whether or not it is controlled by AT. Although it is possible to specify that the notification target combination has been won, it is sufficient to prevent the player from specifying the stop order that is advantageous to the player. The above may be divided into a plurality of groups so that each group includes one advantageous combination for the player, and a different transmission winning number may be set for each divided group. As a result, it is possible for the sub-control unit 91 to specify whether the notification target combination belonging to any of the plurality of groups has been elected, and to execute the effect according to the specified group.

Next, the error notification effect executed by the sub-control unit 91 of this embodiment will be described.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment has various abnormalities (medal insertion abnormality, medal selector 29) such as when any one of a rotation error, a medal insertion error, and a medal payout error is detected in the reel control process as described above. When foreign matter detection inside, reel rotation abnormality, medal payout abnormality, foreign matter detection near the payout exit, RAM abnormality, set value abnormality, empty hopper tank 34a, full tank detection of overflow tank 35, abnormal winning, etc.) are detected. An error command capable of identifying the type of abnormality detected by executing error processing is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. As shown in FIG. 18, the error command includes error codes E1 to E8 capable of identifying the type of abnormality occurring. E1 is an overflow error and indicates that the overflow tank 35 is full, E2 is a medal supply error and an empty state of the hopper tank 34a is detected, and E3 is a medal. It is a clogging error and indicates that a foreign substance near the medal payout outlet 9 has been detected. E5 is a medal insertion error, and E6 indicates that an abnormal passage of a medal by the insertion medal sensor 31 is detected, and E6 is a rotation error and reel rotation. E7 is an abnormal winning error, and E8 is a RAM error, indicating that a winning combination for which winning is not allowed is detected by the internal lottery, and RAM 41c at startup. Indicates that the data in is not normal.

In addition, when the output state of the door open detection switch 25 changes or when the game ends, the door command is issued, and when the setting shifts to the setting change state at startup, the setting command is used, and the bet number is changed after one game is completed. When the end estimation time (60 seconds in this embodiment) elapses without being set and the state shifts to the standby state, a standby command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91.

On the other hand, the sub-control unit 91 executes an error notification effect for notifying the error code specified based on the error command by receiving the error command, and receives the door command to notify the front door 1b. When it is specified that is in the open state, the door open notification effect for notifying that the front door 1b is open is executed, and the setting command is received to indicate that the setting is in the open state. By executing the notification effect during setting change and receiving the standby command, the standby effect indicating that the user is in the standby state is executed.

As shown in FIG. 19A, in the error notification effect, the transmission area 51b of the liquid crystal display 51 is set as an effect prohibition area for prohibiting the display of an image or the like, and the transmission area 51b of the liquid crystal display 51 is set. In the predetermined area of the display area 51a to be excluded (in the predetermined frame A in this embodiment), the error code specified based on the error command and the character, image, character image, etc. indicating the content of the error are set in the predetermined area of the error. Display in a common area regardless of the type. That is, during the period when the main control unit 41 is controlled to the error state and the error notification effect is being executed, the transmission region 51b of the liquid crystal display 51, that is, the reels 2L and 2C through which the winning line LN and the invalid lines LM1 to 4 pass. By keeping the transmittance at 100% without displaying an image or the like in the display area 51a overlapping the area corresponding to the 2R symbol, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R can be visually recognized through the transmission area 51b. It is designed so that the sex does not deteriorate.

Further, in the error notification effect, the game history information related to the game history such as the number of credits displayed in the front effect during the game is made invisible to the player, and as shown in FIG. 18, the effect LED 52a An image of a character that lights up to c in a predetermined lighting mode indicating that an error has occurred, and displays a predetermined sound indicating that an error has occurred from the speakers 53 and 54 on the liquid crystal display 51. By outputting in the output mode corresponding to the above, the type of error occurring is notified by using the liquid crystal display 51, the effect effect LEDs 52a to c, and the speakers 53, 54.

Further, as shown in FIG. 19A, in the error notification effect, the error notification effect is executed on the liquid crystal display 51 together with the error code specified based on the error command and the image of the character indicating the content of the error. An image of a predetermined character is selected and displayed according to the type of effect pattern before the error notification effect is executed. For example, before the error notification effect is executed, the character A (see, for example, FIG. 19B). If the error notification effect is executed based on the reception of an error command while the effect is being executed based on the effect pattern for performing the effect using the image of, the error notification effect is performed in the error notification effect. A character corresponding to the effect pattern before execution, that is, an image of character A is selected and displayed together with an error code or the like, and for example, before executing the error notification effect, the player or the like recognizes that the character is different from character A. Performing an effect using an image of a possible character B (see, for example, FIG. 19 (c)) While executing an effect based on an effect pattern, an error notification effect is executed based on the receipt of an error command. In the error notification effect, a character corresponding to the effect pattern before the error notification effect is executed, that is, an image of the character B is selected and displayed together with an error code or the like, thereby displaying the display mode of the liquid crystal display 51. Is displayed in a display mode selected from a plurality of display modes, and the occurrence of an error corresponding to the error code is notified by one of the plurality of notification modes.

As a result, the sub control unit 91 is controlled to an error state in the main control unit 41, and during the period in which the error notification effect is being executed, the transmission region 51b of the liquid crystal display 51, that is, the winning line LN and the invalid lines LM1 to 4 Since no image or the like is displayed in the display area 51a that overlaps with the area corresponding to the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R through which the reels pass, the liquid crystal display is displayed when an error occurs during the execution of the above-mentioned reel front effect. By switching the effect mode of the device 51 from the front effect to the error notification effect, all the areas of the transmission area 51b including the areas corresponding to the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R through which the invalid lines LM1 to LM pass are transmitted. The visibility is set to 100% at normal times, and the occurrence of an abnormality specified by an error command is notified.

Further, regardless of the type of error, a common control, that is, a common effect prohibition area is set, and an error code or the like is displayed in a common predetermined area to notify the error.

As shown in FIG. 18, in the door opening notification effect, the effect LEDs 52a to c are turned on in a predetermined lighting mode indicating that the front door 1b is in the open state, and the front door 1b is in the open state from the speakers 53 and 54. By outputting a predetermined sound indicating that the above is true, the effect type LEDs 52a to c, the speakers 53, and 54 are used to notify the type of error occurring. In the door opening notification effect, the display mode of the liquid crystal display 51 is not changed based on the reception of the door command, and the display mode performed before receiving the door command is continued. ing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20, in the setting changing notification effect, the transmission region 51b of the liquid crystal display 51 is set as an effect prohibition area for prohibiting the display of images and the like, as in the error notification effect. A message indicating that the setting has been changed is displayed in a predetermined area (in the predetermined frame B in this embodiment) of the display area 51a excluding the transparent area 51b of the display unit, and the setting is controlled to the setting change state. Notify that. Further, in the setting changing notification, the game history information related to the game history such as the number of credits is made invisible to the player as in the error notification effect.

As a result, the main control unit 41 is controlled to the setting change state, and the reel through which the transmission region 51b of the liquid crystal display 51, that is, the winning line LN and the invalid lines LM1 to LM4 pass during the period during which the setting changing effect is being executed. Images and the like are not displayed on the area corresponding to the 2L, 2C, and 2R symbols, and the visibility of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R through the transmission area 51b is not deteriorated. There is.

Further, in the setting changing notification effect, the liquid crystal display 51 is not displayed in a plurality of display modes as in the error notification effect, and the setting is made regardless of the type of effect pattern before the setting change notification effect is executed. In one notification mode in which only a message indicating that the setting is in the changed state is displayed and notified, the fact that the setting is changed is notified.

As described above, the sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment occurs the predetermined event when the occurrence of an error is detected as a predetermined event that is likely to occur in the situation where the player is playing the game. When the setting change state is controlled as a specific event that is likely to occur in a situation where the first notification means (error notification effect) for notifying the effect can be executed and the player is not playing the game. It is possible to execute the second notification means (notification effect during setting change) for notifying that the specific event has occurred, and the first notification means has a plurality of notification modes (for example, character A) when a predetermined event occurs. In any of the display modes using the above and the display mode using the character B), the notification that the predetermined event has occurred is notified, while the second notification means is one when a specific event occurs. Since the notification that the specific event has occurred is notified in the notification mode (for example, the display mode in which only the message is displayed), when a predetermined event occurs, it is notified by a plurality of notification modes, which improves the interest. Therefore, when a specific event occurs, it is notified by only one notification mode, so that it is possible to prevent an excessive increase in the amount of data required for notification.

In this embodiment, as a specific event, the control of the setting change state that does not occur in the situation where the player is playing the game is applied, but as the specific event, the player is more than the predetermined event. Any configuration may apply an event that is unlikely to occur in a situation where the player is playing a game, and as a specific event, a part of an error that is relatively unlikely to occur in a situation where the player is playing a game. For example, a configuration may be configured to apply a setting change error, a RAM abnormality error, or the like, and even in such a configuration, it is necessary for notification by not having a plurality of notification modes of a specific event in which the degree of involvement of the player is low. It is possible to prevent the capacity of the data to be excessively increased.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the error notification effect as the first notification means, the notification is performed using the image of the character corresponding to the type of the effect pattern that was executed before the error notification effect was executed. However, the first notification means may have a configuration in which the notification mode differs depending on the effect pattern executed before the first notification means is executed, and such a configuration allows the first notification. Since the notification mode differs depending on the effect before the means is executed, it is possible to improve the interest.

The standby effect executed by the sub-control unit 91 of this embodiment includes a normal demonstration effect (hereinafter referred to as a demo effect) indicating that the unit is in a standby state, and power consumption in the slot machine 1 as compared with the demo effect. The sub-control unit 91 shifts to the standby state when the power saving mode is selected in advance by the standby effect switch 57 as the effect mode of the standby effect. When this is done, the power saving mode is executed as a standby effect, and if the power saving mode is not selected, a normal demo effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 21A, in the demo effect, the transmission region 51b of the liquid crystal display 51 is set as an effect prohibition area for prohibiting the display of images and the like, as in the error notification effect, and the liquid crystal display is displayed. A message indicating that the demo is being produced is displayed in a predetermined area of the display area 51a (in the predetermined frame B in this embodiment) excluding the transparent area 51b of the 51, and the setting is controlled to be changed. Notify. Also, in the demo production, the number of games since the end of ART or RB among the game history information related to the game history such as the number of credits can be made visible to the player, while other history information cannot be seen. do. It should be noted that the history information other than the number of games since the end of ART or RB may be visible to the player or the like, and even if the configuration is such that all the history information that can be displayed can be visually recognized by the player or the like. It is good, and the slot machine 1 is installed to have a predetermined priority, for example, information that is advantageous to a player who has played a game until then, information that is advantageous to a new player who plays a game after that. A predetermined part of the history information may be visible to the player or the like depending on whether the information is useful for management or operation of the store clerk or the like.

Further, as shown in FIG. 18, in the demonstration effect, the liquid crystal display 51 and the effect effect LEDs 52a to c were used by lighting the effect LED 52a to c in a predetermined lighting mode indicating that the demonstration effect is in progress. It is designed to perform production.

As shown in FIG. 21B, in the power saving mode, the transmission region 51b of the liquid crystal display 51 is set as an effect prohibition area for prohibiting the display of an image or the like, as in the error notification effect, and the liquid crystal display is displayed. A message indicating that the power saving mode is set is displayed in a predetermined area (in the predetermined frame B in this embodiment) of the display area 51a excluding the transparent area 51b of the device 51, and the setting is controlled to be changed. Is notified. Further, in the setting changing notification, the information related to the game history such as the number of credits is made invisible to the player as in the error notification effect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 18, in the power saving mode, the effect effects LEDs 52a to c are not turned on as in the demonstration effect, and the effect using the minimum effect device of only the liquid crystal display 51 is executed. It has become.

As described above, the transmission region 51b of the liquid crystal display 51, that is, the winning line LN and the invalid line LM1 The image or the like is not displayed on top of the area corresponding to the pattern of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R through which the LM4 passes, and the visibility of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R through the transmission area 51b is not deteriorated. It has become.

The sub-control unit 91 of this embodiment has a liquid crystal display having a transmission region 51b at a position on the front side (player side) of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R so that each reel 2L, 2C, and 2R can be visually recognized from the player side. A device 51 is provided, and by displaying an image or the like in the transparent area 51b in response to a command received from the main control unit 41, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are visible to the player. In the front area of the overlapping reels 2L, 2C and 2R, it is possible to execute an effect of changing the visibility of the reels 2L, 2C and 2R from the player side to a different visibility than usual.

In such a configuration, it is permitted to perform an effect of changing the visibility of the reels in the specific area corresponding to the symbol of each reel through which the winning line LN for which the winning is determined does not pass in the transmission area 51b. By prohibiting the execution of the effect in the predetermined area corresponding to the symbol of each reel through which the winning line LN passes, the reel 2L is secured while ensuring the visibility of the area on the winning line LN of each reel. It is possible to execute the effect on the front of the 2C, 2R, but even if the visibility is secured only in the predetermined area on the winning line LN, the visibility of the predetermined area other than the winning line LN remains changed. Then, when an event such as an abnormality related to the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C and 2R occurs, it becomes difficult to grasp the situation of the reels 2L, 2C and 2R.

On the other hand, in the main control unit 41 of this embodiment, when a specific event that may have caused an abnormality such as a reel rotation error occurs, it is possible to detect that the specific event has occurred. The sub-control unit 91 can execute an effect of changing the visibility of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R from the player side in the transmission region 51b of the liquid crystal display 51, and is in the game. During the period during which at least one reel 2L, 2C, and 2R is rotated, the player in the specific area corresponding to the symbol of each reel through which the winning line LN for which the winning is determined in the transmission area 51b does not pass passes. When a specific event occurs while performing an effect of changing the visibility of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R from the side so as to be lower than usual, all including the specific area of the transmission area 51b. Since the occurrence of a specific event is notified by normal visibility with the transmittance of the region of 100%, the visibility of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R can be improved during the period during rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R as the game progresses. When performing the effect of changing, by changing the visibility of a specific area of the transmission area 51b, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R can be visually recognized in the widest possible transmission area 51b without deteriorating the visibility of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R in the predetermined area. While it is possible to produce an effect that changes the sex, the visibility of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is changed in the region including the specific region of the transmission region 51b during the period during the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R as the game progresses. When a specific event occurs in a situation where the effect is being executed, the visibility of the entire area including the specific area of the transmission area 51b is ensured so that the situation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R can be easily grasped. Can be done.

In this embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 has a transmittance of 100 in the transmission region 51b as an effect of changing the visibility of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R from the player side in the transmission region 51b of the liquid crystal display 51. By displaying an image or the like of less than% and displaying an image or the like on the front surface of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, the visibility of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R on the back surface is changed. In the effect of changing the visibility of the 2C and 2R, the reel 2L, 2C and 2R corresponding to the see-through window 3 may be changed from the normal visibility to a special visibility, and the see-through window 3 may be used. A transmissive display device other than the liquid crystal display, for example, an EL display, a light guide plate, etc., is arranged on the front side (player side) of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and the image on the transmissive display is displayed. Superimposing on the front side of reels 2L, 2C, 2R, which changes the normal visibility in the non-transparent state to the special visibility in the state where the image is displayed or the transmittance is lowered. A reel that is provided with a movable object that can be made to move, a so-called accessory, and changes the normal visibility in which the movable object is not superimposed on the front side of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R to a special visibility in which the movable object is superimposed. The color of the backlight, which is a state in which the backlight is placed on the back side of the 2L, 2C, 2R symbols, etc., and the backlight is emitted in a normal color (white, etc.) and in a normal illuminance, is used. It may be changed to a special visibility by changing the illuminance / brightness and turning on / off.

Further, in the present embodiment, as a specific event, when the sub-control unit 91 is performing an effect of changing the visibility of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R from the player side in the transmission region 51b of the liquid crystal display 51. When it is detected that an abnormality such as a reel rotation error has occurred on the main control unit 41 side, the transmittance of all areas including the specific area of the transmission area 51b is set to 100% and specified by normal visibility. Although it is configured to notify the occurrence of an event, the specific event is not limited to the one detected by the main control unit 41, but the one detected by the sub control unit 91, for example, an abnormality related to the sub control unit 91, or a sub control unit. It may be an abnormality related to each effect device controlled by 91, and when these abnormalities are notified using the liquid crystal display 51, the transmittance of all the regions including the specific region of the transmission region 51b is set to 100%. It may be configured to notify with normal visibility. In such a configuration, when an abnormality occurs on the sub-control unit 91 side that is not directly related to the game, all the regions of the transmission region 51b are set to normal visibility. Can be avoided from being disturbed.

Further, the sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment changes the visibility of the reels in the predetermined region corresponding to the design of each reel through which the winning line LN passes out of the transmission region 51b of the liquid crystal display 51 in the front effect during the game. It is a configuration that prohibits the execution of the effect to be performed for the entire period during the game, but in the front effect during the game, a prize is won for at least the period in which at least one reel is rotated for the progress of the game. Any configuration may be used as long as it is prohibited to execute the effect in a predetermined area corresponding to the symbol of each reel through which the line LN passes, and even during the game period, for example, after the start switch 7 is operated, for example, after the start switch 7 is operated. During a delay period in which the start of rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is delayed, or during a period in which the stop operation for stopping the reel after the start of rotation of the reel is controlled to a freeze state in which the stop operation is invalidated, etc. During the period not directly related to the progress, it is possible to execute the effect of changing the visibility of the reel in the predetermined area corresponding to the symbol of each reel through which the winning line LN passes in the transmission area 51b. It may be configured to be reeled. Even with such a configuration, at least during the period in which at least one reel is rotated for the progress of the game, the effect is executed in a predetermined area corresponding to the symbol of each reel through which the winning line LN passes. By prohibiting, as in the present embodiment, when a specific event occurs, the visibility of the entire area including the specific area of the transmission area 51b is ensured, and the situation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is facilitated. Can be grasped by.

The sub-control unit 91 of this embodiment displays an image or the like on the transmission region 51b of the liquid crystal display 51 even during the period when the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are not rotating, so that the front surface of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R can be displayed. As a reel front effect that superimposes an image or the like on the reel, it is possible to execute the stopped front effect, and as a specific event, the reel front effect is executed during the period when the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are not rotated. Even when it is detected that an abnormality such as a medal jam error has occurred on the main control unit 41 side, a specific event with normal visibility with the transmission rate of all areas including the specific area of the transmission area 51b set to 100%. In the situation where the reel front effect is executed during the period when the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are not rotated, when a specific event occurs, the liquid crystal display 51 indicates that the specific event has occurred. The status of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R can be easily grasped even in the case of notifying by, and the reel front effect is executed regardless of whether the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotating. When a specific event occurs in a situation, the control for notifying the specific event can be standardized.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment is in the output state when a predetermined event occurs among the events in which an abnormality may occur, such as when the output state of the door open detection switch 25 changes. A door command or the like capable of specifying a change is transmitted to the sub control unit 91, and the sub control unit 91 is in the game and at least during the period during which the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotating as the game progresses. When the predetermined event occurs in the situation where the front effect is being executed, the display mode of the liquid crystal display 51 is not changed based on the occurrence of the predetermined event, while the effect is produced. Effect The LEDs 52a to c are turned on in a predetermined lighting mode indicating that the front door 1b is in the open state, and the speakers 53 and 54 output a predetermined sound indicating that the front door 1b is in the open state. Since the occurrence of a predetermined event is notified while continuing the reel front effect, the overall visibility of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is notified as normal visibility according to the importance of the event in which an abnormality may have occurred. It is possible to set whether to perform the notification or to perform the notification while continuing the reel front effect.

When the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment satisfies the waiting condition and shifts to the waiting state when the estimated end time (60 seconds in the present embodiment) elapses without setting the number of bets after the end of one game. By transmitting a standby command to the sub-control unit 91 and receiving the standby command, the sub-control unit 91 executes a standby effect with the overall visibility of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R as normal visibility. Therefore, the situation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R can be easily grasped when the game is not played.

The sub-control unit 91 of this embodiment can execute the demo effect and the power saving mode as the standby effect, and issues a standby command to the demo effect or the power saving mode selected in advance by operating the standby effect switch 57. Although the configuration is such that the sub-control unit 91 is executed when it is received, the sub-control unit 91 may be configured to include a plurality of types of standby effects or a configuration to include only one type. Further, in such a configuration, the overall visibility of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R may be the normal visibility in at least one type of standby effect.

Further, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment determines whether or not the combination of the symbols of the predetermined winning combination that has been internally won is stopped on one winning line LN extending through the middle stages of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. However, since the combination of the symbols of the winning combination is stopped on the winning line LN, it is determined that the winning combination has won the prize, but the winning line is different in the game state, the number of bets, etc. The configuration may change according to the situation. With such a configuration, even if the winning line changes according to the game state, if a specific event occurs while the reel front effect is being executed during the game, the reels 2L and 2C By setting the overall visibility of 2R as normal visibility to notify the occurrence of a specific event, the situation of reels 2L, 2C, and 2R can be easily grasped, and in any gaming state, etc. Even if there is, it is possible to standardize the control for notifying the specific event when the specific event occurs in the situation where the reel front effect is being executed.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment can detect when a rotation error of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R occurs as a specific event, and the sub control unit 91 has a rotation error as a specific event. In this case, the transmittance of all the regions including the specific region of the transmission region 51b is set to 100%, and the occurrence of the rotation error is notified with normal visibility. Therefore, when the rotation error occurs as a specific event, the reel 2L, The situation of 2C and 2R can be easily grasped.

By instructing the display control circuit 92, the sub-control unit 91 of this embodiment can display an image or the like using the image data stored in the CGROMs 99a to c. Then, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the sub control unit 91 executes control for inspecting the stored contents of the CGROMs 99a to c mounted on the CGROM board 99, and displays the inspection result on the liquid crystal display 51. For example, when assembling the slot machine 1 in a factory or the like, whether or not an appropriate ROM is attached to the CGROM board 99 is stored in the ROM on the CGROM board 99. Whether or not the data is normal can be inspected based on the display of the liquid crystal display 51.

Hereinafter, the control related to the inspection of the CGROMs 99a to c executed by the sub-control unit 91 will be described with reference to FIGS. 22 to 28.

As shown in FIG. 22, a ROM 91b, a RAM 91c, an I / O port 91d, a display control circuit 92, LED drive circuits 93a to e, and a checking LED 59 are connected to the sub CPU 91a of the sub control unit 91.

In the display control circuit 92, the register used for control by the display control circuit 92, the register that the display control circuit 92 can write and refer to, and the register that the sub-control unit 91 can refer to, and the display control circuit 92 can be referred to. It also has a plurality of types of control registers including a register writable by the sub CPU 91a, and when an instruction is written by the sub CPU 91a to a predetermined register, control according to the instruction by the sub control unit 91 is executed. ..

In particular, in the display control circuit 92, information display data including the minimum image data necessary for displaying information such as characters and symbols on the liquid crystal display 51 is written in a predetermined register, and further predetermined data is written. The information display data written in the predetermined register is written by the read instruction 1 which is an instruction to store the information display data in the VRAM which is the work storage area of the display control circuit 92. Is stored in a predetermined area of the VRAM.

Further, display instruction data for specifying the contents to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 is written in a predetermined register, and an image or the like is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 with the contents of the display instruction data in another predetermined register. By writing the display command 1 which is the command of, the control for displaying an image or the like on the liquid crystal display 51 with the contents of the display instruction data is executed by using the information display data stored in the VRAM. Further, display instruction data for specifying the contents to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 is written in a predetermined register, and an image or the like is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 with the contents of the display instruction data in another predetermined register. By writing the display command 2 which is the command of, the image data stored in the CGROM 99a to c is read into a predetermined register according to the content of the display instruction data, and the image data is used as the content of the display instruction data. Control is performed to display an image or the like on the liquid crystal display 51. Further, by writing an inspection data read instruction, which is an instruction to read inspection data for a predetermined CGROM, to a predetermined register, the inspection data stored in a specific address of the CGROM designated by the instruction is written. Is read, and the control of writing the inspection data to a predetermined register that can be referred to by the sub-control unit 91 is executed. Further, by writing a checksum instruction which is an instruction to calculate a checksum of a predetermined area for a predetermined CGROM to a predetermined register, a checksum of a specific area of the CGROM designated by the instruction is written. Is calculated, and the control of writing the calculation result to a predetermined register that can be referred to by the sub-control unit 91 is executed. Further, when a predetermined instruction is written to a predetermined register and the predetermined control is executed and the control is completed, the sub-control unit 91 sets a flag capable of specifying that the predetermined control corresponding to the instruction is completed. It is designed to write to a predetermined register that can be referred to.

Image data for the sub-control unit 91 to display an image or the like on the liquid crystal display 51 is stored in advance in the CGROM 99a to c, and the character, background effect, etc. to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 are configured as the image data. Graphic data to be used, font data of characters and symbols, video data, template data as a template such as a position for displaying characters and characters, etc. are stored, and the display control circuit 92 refers to the stored contents of CGROM 99a to c. It is possible. Further, for the data in a specific area to be checkedsum described later in each CGROM99a to c, the checksum calculation result is the connection position of the CGROM99a to c when the CGROM99a to c are correctly connected to the CGROM board 99. (In this embodiment, CGROM99a to c are correctly connected to the CGROM board 99, so that the calculation result of each checksum is sequentially "1234". , "5678", "9ABC"). In this embodiment, the configuration includes three CGROMs 99a to c, but a configuration including one CGROM or a configuration including more than three CGROMs may be provided.

The LED drive circuits 93a to e are circuits of independent systems, and the effect LED 52a to c, the reel LED 55, and the effect LED 56a are connected to each other. By inputting a control signal to one LED drive circuit 93a to e, the corresponding effect LED 52a to c, the reel LED 55, and the effect LED 56a are controlled to be lit.

During the check, the LED 59 is connected to the sub control unit 91 without going through the LED drive circuit, and can be directly turned on by the sub CPU 91a.

As shown in FIG. 23, in a predetermined area of ROM 91b in the sub control unit 91, inspection data stored in a specific address read based on the above-mentioned inspection data reading instruction in each CGROM 99a to c The data that matches with is stored in advance as collation data. In this embodiment, the ROM 91b contains 16 bytes of data (00h, 01h, 02h, ..., 0fh) starting from a predetermined address of the CGROM99a as collation data of the CGROM99a, and a predetermined CGROM99b as the collation data of the CGROM99b. 16 bytes of data (10h, 11h, 12h, ..., 1fh) starting from the address and 16 bytes of data (20h, 21h, 22h, ..., 2fh) starting from the predetermined address of the CGROM99c are stored. Further, in a predetermined area of the ROM 91b, data (font data or the like) required at least for displaying information such as characters and symbols on the liquid crystal display 51 is stored in advance as information display data.

As a control for inspecting the stored contents of the CGROM 99a to c, the sub control unit 91 performs a simple check for displaying whether or not a ROM containing predetermined data is mounted on the CGROM board, and a ROM mounted on the CGROM board. It is possible to perform a detailed check to display the data contents of. The control contents related to the simple check and the detailed check will be described with reference to FIGS. 24 to 27.

When the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started and the power is turned on to the effect control board 90 and the operation is started by the occurrence of the reset, the sub control unit 91 sets the start time. Further, when the power is turned on to the effect control board 90, the power LED 60 provided on the effect control board 90 is turned on, suggesting that the sub control unit 91 is operating. Then, after making the start-up setting, the sub control unit 91 waits for a predetermined period until a command is received from the main control unit 41, and when the command is received, the sub control unit 91 starts control according to the command. On the other hand, if the command is not received within a predetermined period after the startup setting is made, the control of the simple check is started.

As shown in FIG. 24, after the power is turned on and started, the sub-control unit 91 waits while determining whether or not a command has been received, and a predetermined period has elapsed without receiving any command. When it is determined that, the control of the simple check is started, and the lighting mode of the effect effect LEDs 52a to c, the reel LEDs 55, the effect LED 56a, and the checking LED 59 indicates that the simple check control is being executed. It is set to the checking mode 1 in which the light is turned on in a mode different from that at the time of starting. By setting the mode 1 during the check, the LED drive circuits 93a to e are different from the lighting mode during the normal effect of the effect LED 52a to c, the reel LED55, and the effect LED 56a connected to the respective circuits. Controls the lighting mode so that it can be visually recognized (for example, a mode of blinking at a faster or slower cycle than that at normal startup, a mode of lighting in a different color, etc.), and the sub-control unit 91 checks the LED 59 during checking in a simple check. It is controlled to a lighting mode in which it is possible to visually recognize that the control is being executed (for example, a lighting mode in which the light is always lit in red). As a result, the slot machine 1 indicates that the simple check control is being executed by controlling these LEDs in the checking mode 1 during the period during which the simple check control is being executed by the sub control unit 91. It becomes recognizable from the outside of.

Then, the sub-control unit 91 sets the effect LED 52a to c and the like in the checking mode 1, and then displays the information display data (minimum required for displaying information such as characters and symbols on the liquid crystal display 51). In this embodiment, the font data) is read from the ROM 91b and written to a predetermined register of the display control circuit 92. After that, an instruction to read the information display data from the register is written to the register of the display control circuit 92.

On the other hand, the display control circuit 92 reads the information display data from the register according to the instruction by writing the instruction to a predetermined register by the sub control unit 91, and stores the work in the display control circuit 92 for work. The information display data is stored in the VRAM, which is an area. Further, after the information display data is stored in the VRAM, the information display data storage flag indicating that the information display data is stored in the VRAM is set in a predetermined register.

After confirming that the information display data storage flag is set in the register of the display control circuit 92, the sub control unit 91 displays display instruction data for displaying a simple check screen indicating that the simple check is being executed. Is written to the register of the display control circuit 92, and then the display instruction 1 is written to a predetermined register of the display control circuit 92.

On the other hand, the display control circuit 92 refers to the display instruction data of the register by writing the display instruction 1 to a predetermined register, and displays a simple check screen on the liquid crystal display 51 with the contents of the display instruction data. The control to display the image etc. is executed so as to be performed. In the control to display the simple check screen, the layout and characters of the image to be displayed are specified based on the display instruction data, and the characters and the like are specified according to the information display data stored in the VRAM according to the specified layout. As shown in FIG. 25A, a display area 51a other than the transmission area 51b among the areas in which an image or the like can be displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 (in this embodiment, the see-through window 3 of the reel). A simple check screen is displayed in the upper display area 51a). Then, as shown in FIG. 25B, on the simple check screen at the start of the simple check, a character string (in this embodiment, "CGROM Check1") that can specify that the simple check is being executed is displayed. Character strings indicating CGROM99a to c to be inspected (in this embodiment, "CGROM-a", "CGROM-b", "CGROM-c") are displayed using font data included in the information display data. Let me.

The sub-control unit 91 writes the display command 1 to the register of the display control circuit 92, displays the simple check screen on the liquid crystal display 51, and then designates one specific CGROM among the CGROMs 99a to c as the inspection target. An inspection data read command (specified in the order of CGROM99a, b, c in this embodiment) is written to a predetermined register of the display control circuit 92. On the other hand, the display control circuit 92 reads the inspection data from the CGROM designated by the instruction by writing the inspection data read instruction to the predetermined register, and transfers the inspection data to the predetermined register. The inspection data storage flag indicating that the inspection data has been written and the inspection data has been written is set in a predetermined register. When the inspection data of the CGROM specified by the inspection data read command cannot be read by the display control circuit 92 (for example, the storage area of the data is destroyed or the CGROM is appropriately connected to the CGROM board 99). If the data does not match and the data cannot be read (for example), the data that does not match the collation data (for example, all 0 or 1 data) is set in the register as the inspection data and the inspection data is set. Set the storage flag to a given register.

Further, after writing the inspection data read instruction to the predetermined register, the sub control unit 91 refers to the predetermined area of the ROM 91b and reads the collation data corresponding to the CGROM specified by the inspection data read instruction. Then, after the inspection data storage flag is set in the predetermined register of the display control circuit 92, the inspection data is read from the registry of the display control circuit 92. Then, the collation data and the inspection data are compared, and if they match, display instruction data indicating that the CGROM to be inspected is normal is created, but if they do not match, the display instruction data is created. Create display instruction data indicating that there is an abnormality in the CGROM to be inspected. Then, the created display instruction data is written to a predetermined register of the display control circuit 92, and the display instruction 1 is further written to a predetermined register. After that, it is determined whether or not all CGROMs 99a to c have been inspected, and if it is determined that all CGROMs 99a to c have not been inspected, the above-mentioned control is repeatedly executed with the remaining CGROMs as inspection targets. do.

On the other hand, the display control circuit 92 sets the inspection data storage flag, and then the display instruction 1 is written to a predetermined register to refer to the display instruction data of the register and display the contents of the display instruction data. The simple check screen is updated according to the control displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, that is, the comparison result between the collation data and the inspection data by the sub control unit 91. For example, as shown in FIG. 25 (c), when the comparison result between the collation data and the inspection data is normal for CGROM99a and abnormal for CGROM99b and c, the checking screen is displayed. A character string (“OK” in this embodiment) that can be specified to be normal is displayed at the position corresponding to CGROM99a, and it is possible to specify that it is abnormal at the position corresponding to CGROM99b, c. Character string ("NG" in this embodiment) is displayed. In addition, when displaying a character string that can identify the fact that it is abnormal, the simple check screen is updated so that the color of the character string and the background color around the character string are inverted and displayed. Then, even when any of the other CGROM99a to c is normal or abnormal, the simple check screen is similarly updated so that the character string corresponding to the normal or abnormal is displayed for each CGROM99a to c. , Display the inspection results of CGROM99a to c by simple check.

Then, when the sub control unit 91 determines that all the CGROMs 99a to c have been inspected, the control of the effect LED 52a to c, the reel LED 55, the effect LED 56a, and the checking LED 59 in the checking mode 1 is terminated. .. After that, it waits until the effect switch 56 is operated, and when it is detected that the effect switch 56 is operated, it is determined that there is a request to execute the detailed check, and the detailed check process described later is executed. Then, a detailed check is performed on CGROM99a to c.

As described above, in the simple check, the sub control unit 91 can display the simple check screen on the liquid crystal display 51 by the display control circuit 92 by using the information display data stored in the ROM 91b. It has become.

Further, on the simple check screen, the information display data stored in the ROM 91b is used to display the result of the simple check corresponding to the CGROMs 99a to c, so that an abnormality (data in the CGROM) is displayed in a specific CGROM. It is possible to determine whether or not there is an abnormality (abnormality in the connection position of the CGROM). Further, when there is an abnormality in a specific CGROM, the character string indicating the inspection result for the corresponding CGROM is inverted and displayed, so that it is easy to recognize that the specific CGROM has an abnormality.

Further, the sub-control unit 91 sets the lighting mode of the effect effect LEDs 52a to c, the reel LEDs 55, the effect LED 56a, and the checking LED 59 to the checking mode 1 during the execution of the simple check control, and sets the lighting mode to the predetermined lighting mode. Since it is controlled to, it becomes possible to recognize from the outside of the slot machine 1 that the control of the simple check is executed. For example, the liquid crystal display 51, the display control circuit 92, the sub control unit 91, etc. fail and the simple check is performed. Even when the screen is not normally displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, it is possible to recognize that the simple check control is being performed.

Next, the control contents related to the detailed check will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27.

The sub-control unit 91 executes the above-mentioned simple check control, displays the comparison result between the collation data and the inspection data for the CGROM 99a to c on the simple check screen, and then detects the operation of the effect switch 56. By doing so, the control of the detailed check is executed.

As shown in FIG. 26, after the sub-control unit 91 starts the control of the detailed check, first, the effect LED 52a to c, the reel LED 55, the effect LED 56a, and the lighting mode of the checking LED 59 are controlled for the detailed check. Is set to the checking mode 2 in which the light is turned on in a mode different from that at the time of normal startup and the simple check. When the check mode 2 is set, the LED drive circuits 93a to e turn on the effect LED 52a to c, the reel LED 55, and the effect LED 56a connected to the respective circuits during the normal effect and the simple check. The sub-control unit 91 controls the lighting mode so that it can be visually recognized that it is different from the mode (for example, a mode of blinking at a faster or slower cycle than at the time of normal startup and a simple check, a mode of lighting with a different color, etc.). During the check, the LED 59 is controlled to a lighting mode (for example, a lighting mode that blinks in red) so that it can be visually recognized that the detailed check control is being executed. As a result, the slot machine 1 indicates that the detailed check control is being executed by controlling these LEDs in the checking mode 2 during the period during which the detailed check control is being executed by the sub control unit 91. It becomes recognizable from the outside of.

After that, the sub-control unit 91 writes the display instruction data for displaying the detailed check screen indicating that the detailed check is being executed to the register of the display control circuit 92, and then sends the display instruction 1 to the display control circuit 92. Write to the specified register of.

On the other hand, the display control circuit 92 refers to the display instruction data of the register by writing the display instruction 1 to a predetermined register, and displays a detailed check screen on the liquid crystal display 51 with the contents of the display instruction data. The control to display the image etc. is executed so as to be performed. In the control to display the detailed check screen, the layout and characters of the image to be displayed are specified based on the display instruction data, and are stored in the VRAM from the time of the simple check control according to the specified layout. Similar to the simple check screen, by displaying characters and the like according to the information display data, a display area 51a other than the transmission area 51b (in this embodiment, the reel) in the area where the image or the like can be displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. A detailed check screen is displayed in the display area 51a) on the upper side of the see-through window 3. Then, as shown in FIG. 27 (b), on the detailed check screen at the start of the detailed check, a character string (in this embodiment, "CGROM Check2") that can specify that the detailed check is being executed is displayed. A character string indicating the CGROM99a to c to be inspected (in this embodiment, "CGROM-a", "CGROM-b", "CGROM-c") and a checksum of each CGROM99a to c are being calculated. (In this embodiment, "Calculating ...") Is displayed using the font data included in the information display data.

The sub-control unit 91 writes the display command 1 to the register of the display control circuit 92, displays the detailed check screen on the liquid crystal display 51, and then designates one specific CGROM among the CGROMs 99a to c as the inspection target. A checksum instruction (specified in the order of CGROM99a, b, c in this embodiment) is written to a predetermined register of the display control circuit 92. On the other hand, the display control circuit 92 sequentially reads the data in a specific area of the CGROM specified by the instruction by writing the checksum instruction to a predetermined register, calculates the checksum, and performs the operation. The result of the above is written in a predetermined register, and the operation completion flag indicating that the result of the operation has been written is set in the predetermined register. When the data in a specific area of the CGROM specified by the checksum instruction cannot be read by the display control circuit 92 (for example, the storage area of the data is destroyed or the CGROM is appropriately connected to the CGROM board 99). If the data does not match and the data cannot be read (for example), data that does not match the normal checksum calculation result (for example, data other than the pre-calculated checksum values of CGROM99a to c) is calculated. As a result, it is set in the register and the operation completion flag is set in the predetermined register.

Further, the sub-control unit 91 stores the checksum calculation result when the calculation completion flag is set in the predetermined register of the display control circuit 92 after writing the checksum instruction to the predetermined register. Read by referring to the register. Then, the operation result of the checksum is set as display instruction data, written to a predetermined register of the display control circuit 92, and further written to a predetermined register. After that, it is determined whether or not all CGROMs 99a to c have been inspected, and if it is determined that all CGROMs 99a to c have not been inspected, the above-mentioned control is repeatedly executed with the remaining CGROMs as inspection targets. do.

On the other hand, the display control circuit 92 refers to the display instruction data of the register by writing the display instruction 1 to a predetermined register after setting the calculation completion flag, and displays the contents of the display instruction data on the liquid crystal display. The detailed check screen is updated so that the control to be displayed on the device 51, that is, the checksum calculation result is displayed. As a result, for example, as shown in FIG. 27B, when the checksum calculation result for the CGROM99a is written to the register as display instruction data, the checksum displayed corresponding to the CGROM99a on the detailed check screen is displayed. The character string indicating that the calculation is in progress is updated to the character string indicating the checksum calculation result (“1234” in this embodiment), indicating that all CGROM99a, b, and c are being calculated. The detailed check is completed by updating the character string to the character string indicating the checksum calculation result.

When the sub-control unit 91 displays the result of the checksum calculation on the liquid crystal display 51 by the display control circuit 92 for all the CGROMs 99a, b, and c, and determines that all the CGROMs 99a to c have been inspected. Ends the control of the effect LED 52a to c, the reel LED 55, the effect LED 56a, and the checking LED 59 in the checking mode 2, and ends the control of the detailed check.

As described above, in the detailed check, the sub control unit 91 can display the detailed check screen on the liquid crystal display 51 by the display control circuit 92 by using the information display data stored in the ROM 91b. It has become. Further, on the detailed check screen, the result of the checksum calculation of CGROM99a to c is displayed using the information display data stored in the ROM 91b, so that an abnormality (abnormality of the data in the CGROM) is displayed in a specific CGROM. , It is possible to determine whether or not there is an abnormality in the connection position of the CGROM.

Further, the data in the specific area to be checkedsum of CGROM99a to c of this embodiment is correctly connected to the CGROM board 99, so that the checksum calculation result corresponds to the connection position of CGROM99a to c. For example, as shown in FIG. 27 (c), the calculation result of the checksums of CGROM99a to c is set to a predetermined continuous numerical value on the detailed check screen. By not doing so, it is possible to determine that there is an abnormality in CGROM99b and CGROM99c (in this embodiment, an abnormality in the connection position of CGROM), and the CGROMs connected to the positions of CGROM99b and CGROM99c on the CGROM board 99 are exchanged. By connecting, that is, by connecting so that the calculation result of the checksum of CGROM99a to c becomes a predetermined continuous numerical value (in this embodiment, "1234", "5678", "9ABC" in that order), CGROM99a It can be identified on the detailed check screen so that ~ c can be correctly connected to the CGROM board 99.

Further, the sub-control unit 91 sets the lighting mode of the effect LED 52a to c, the reel LED 55, the effect LED 56a, and the checking LED 59 to the checking mode 2 during the execution of the detailed check control, and sets the lighting mode to the predetermined lighting mode. Since it is controlled to, it becomes possible to recognize from the outside of the slot machine 1 that the detailed check control is being executed. For example, the liquid crystal display 51, the display control circuit 92, the sub control unit 91, etc. fail, and a simple check is performed. Even if the screen is not normally displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, it is possible to recognize that the detailed check is being controlled. Further, during the execution of the detailed check control, the lighting mode of the effect effect LEDs 52a to c, the reel LEDs 55, the effect LED 56a, and the checking LED 59 is different from the checking mode 1 set during the execution of the simple check. Since these LEDs are controlled to a predetermined lighting mode by setting to 2, it is possible to determine which control is being performed when the simple check or detailed check control is being executed. It can be discriminated by the lighting mode of the LEDs 52a to c, the reel LED55, the effect LED56a, and the checking LED59.

The sub control unit 91 of this embodiment has history data of receiving commands stored in the RAM 91c (hereinafter, may be referred to as command history data) and backup data of the sub control unit 91 (control state of the main control unit 41). , Game status, game history, error history, command history, etc., data to be backed up by the backup RAM 61), predetermined information regarding the sub-control unit 91 such as time information of the clock device 97, when predetermined conditions are satisfied. It is possible to execute the inspection information display control to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and as a predetermined condition, the inspection terminal of the slot machine is connected to the sub control unit 91, and any of these information is displayed. When an inspection display command that can identify whether there is a request to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 is received from the inspection terminal, the inspection information display control is executed and the type specified based on the inspection display command. Information is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. The control content of the inspection information display control executed by the sub-control unit 91 will be described with reference to FIG. 28.

As shown in FIG. 28, the inspection terminal receives a command of the type of information required to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 in response to the predetermined operation by performing the predetermined operation. It is specified from the history, the control status of the main control unit 41 stored in the sub control unit 91, the game history, the time information of the clock device 97, and the like. Then, an inspection display command capable of specifying the type of information required to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 is transmitted to the sub control unit 91.

On the other hand, the sub-control unit 91 identifies the type of information requested to be displayed based on the inspection display command by receiving the inspection display command, and displays the specified type of information. The minimum required information display data (font data in this embodiment) is read from the ROM 91b, written to a predetermined register of the display control circuit 92, and then the information display data is read from the register. The instruction is written to the register of the display control circuit 92. After that, the data corresponding to the type of information specified based on the inspection display command is read from the RAM 91c, and the display instruction data is created based on the corresponding data. For example, when the type of information requested to be displayed is command history data, a new command is issued in chronological order from the command history data (100 steps in this embodiment) stored in the RAM 91c. A number of commands that can be displayed on one screen (25 commands in this embodiment) are sequentially selected, and display instruction data including information on the selected commands is created. When the type of information requested to be displayed is the backup data of the sub control unit 91, the control status of the main control unit 41 to be backed up by the backup RAM 61 among the various data stored in the RAM 91c. (The state of the main control unit 41 specified based on the command received from the main control unit 41, for example, during AT, setting change state, etc.), game state (RT0-4, RB), game history (predetermined). Display instruction data including information on the number of medals paid out during the period of the number of games, the number of times the ART lottery has been won, the number of times the special role has been won, etc.) is created. When the type of information requested to be displayed is the time information of the clock device 97, the display instruction data including the time information is created with reference to the time information of the clock device 97.

After creating the display instruction data corresponding to the type of information requested to be displayed, the display instruction data is written to the predetermined register of the display control circuit 92, and the information display data is stored in the predetermined register of the display control circuit 92. After confirming that the storage flag is set, the display instruction 1 is written to a predetermined register of the display control circuit 92.

On the other hand, in the display control circuit 92, the display instruction 1 is written to a predetermined register by the sub control unit 91, so that the display instruction data of the register is referred to and the contents of the display instruction data are displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. , Display the information about the slot machine 1 corresponding to the type of information requested to be displayed.

Further, when the type of information requested to be displayed is command history data, the inspection terminal determines whether or not a predetermined page feed operation has been performed after transmitting the inspection display command, and the page is displayed. Every time it is determined that the feed operation has been performed, a page feed command that can specify that the page feed operation has been performed is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91.

On the other hand, when the sub-control unit 91 receives the page feed command after displaying the command history data on the liquid crystal display 51, the sub-control unit 91 has 100 commands stored in the RAM 91c (in this embodiment, 100 commands). ), New commands are sequentially selected from the commands other than the once displayed command for the number of minutes that can be displayed on one screen (25 commands in this embodiment), and the information of the selected command is selected. Create display instruction data including. Then, after writing the display instruction data to the predetermined register of the display control circuit 92, the display instruction 1 is written to the predetermined register of the display control circuit 92, thereby newly writing the display instruction data to the display control circuit 92 based on the display instruction data. The command history is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

By repeating such control each time a page feed command is received, the command history stored in the RAM 91c can be sequentially displayed according to the page feed operation. If the page feed operation is repeated and the last command in the command history is displayed, and then the page feed operation is further performed, the command history is displayed again in sequence by returning to the first command.

In the inspection information display control executed by the sub-control unit 91 by receiving the inspection display command from the inspection terminal, the information display data stored in the ROM 91b is used and stored in the ROM 91b. Using the information display data, the display control circuit 92 displays the command reception history stored in the RAM 91c in the liquid crystal display 51, the backup data of the sub control unit 91 (control state of the main control unit 41, game status, etc.). It is possible to display predetermined information about the slot machine 1 such as game history, error history, command history, and other data to be backed up by the backup RAM 61), time information of the clock device 97, and the like.

The sub-control unit 91 of this embodiment writes display instruction data that specifies the content to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 to a predetermined register of the display control circuit 92, and further, an image or the like is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 with the content of the display instruction data. By writing a display command to display the above to another predetermined register of the display control circuit 92, the display control circuit 92 uses the image data and the like stored in the CGROM 99a to c mounted on the CGROM board 99. It is possible to display an image or the like on the liquid crystal display 51 according to the display instruction data, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, control for inspecting the stored contents of the CGROM 99a to c is executed, and the inspection result is obtained. Is written in a predetermined register as display instruction data, so that the inspection result can be displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

In such a configuration, in the control for inspecting the stored contents of the CGROM 99a to c, when the inspection result is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, the inspection is performed using the image data or the like stored in the CGROM 99a to c. If there is an abnormality in the image data stored in the CGROM 99a to c, the inspection result may not be displayed normally.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the control ROM 91b provided in the sub control unit 91 is for displaying information including the minimum image data necessary for displaying information such as characters and symbols on the liquid crystal display 51. The data is stored in advance, and the sub-control unit 91 displays the information display data stored in the ROM 91b for the work of the display control circuit 92 when executing the control for inspecting the stored contents of the CGROMs 99a to c. The display control circuit 92 is stored in the VRAM, which is the storage area of the above, and a display command for displaying an image or the like on the liquid crystal display 51 based on the content of the display instruction data is written in a predetermined register of the display control circuit 92. As a result, the inspection result is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 using the information display data stored in the ROM 91b. Therefore, in the control for inspecting the stored contents of the CGROM 99a to c, the inspection result is displayed on the liquid crystal display. When displaying on the 51, the result of the inspection is not the image data stored in the CGROM 99a to c, but the image data included in the information display data stored in the control ROM 91b provided in the sub control unit 91. Is displayed, so that the inspection result can be normally displayed even when the image data stored in the CGROM 99a to c has an abnormality.

In this embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 commands the display control circuit 92 so that the display control circuit 92 displays an image or the like on the liquid crystal display 51 according to the display instruction data, that is, a plurality of control means. The control means for controlling the display of an image or the like on the liquid crystal display 51 is configured by one control means, for example, the control means for controlling the display of the image or the like on the liquid crystal display 51. The sub-control unit 91 may be configured to directly display an image or the like on the liquid crystal display 51 according to the display instruction data. Further, as a configuration for controlling the display of an image or the like on the liquid crystal display 51 by a plurality of control means, for example, a second sub-control unit provided separately from the first sub-control unit that controls the control related to the effect of the slot machine 1. The sub-control unit may instruct the display control circuit based on the instruction from the first sub-control unit to display an image or the like on the liquid crystal display.

Further, in this embodiment, a simple check and a detailed check can be executed as a control for inspecting the stored contents of the CGROM 99a to c executed by the sub control unit 91, and in the simple check, a specific address of the CGROM 99a to c can be executed. The inspection data stored in the ROM 91b is compared with the collation data stored in the ROM 91b, and it is inspected whether the stored contents of the CGROM 99a to c are normal depending on whether the two match. That is, it is a configuration for determining whether or not the specific data stored in the CGROM 99a to c is normal depending on whether or not it matches the specific value stored in the ROM 91b which is another storage means. In the detailed check, the check sum of the data in a specific area of CGROM99a to c is calculated, and the result of the calculation is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 to determine whether or not the stored contents of CGROM99a to c are normal. By outputting the operation result calculated by the predetermined operation from the predetermined data stored in the possible configurations, that is, the predetermined data stored in the CGROM 99a to c, it is determined whether or not the data is normal based on the output specific data or the operation result. However, in the control for inspecting the stored contents of the CGROMs 99a to c executed by the sub control unit 91, at least whether the stored contents of the CGROMs 99a to c in which the image data is stored is normal or not. Any configuration may be used as long as the inspection is performed so that it is possible to determine whether or not the data is normal. For example, by outputting specific data stored in the CGROM, it is determined whether or not the output specific data is normal. It may be a configuration that enables the above, and whether or not the calculation result calculated by a predetermined calculation from the specific data stored in the CGROM or the image data stored in the CGROM is normal depending on whether or not it is a specific value. It may be configured so that it can be determined whether or not, or the calculation result calculated by a predetermined calculation from the image data stored in the CGROM is another storage means, for example, another control means such as the sub control unit 91. The configuration may be such that it is possible to determine whether or not the data is normal based on whether or not the data matches a specific value stored in the ROM, the dedicated ROM provided only for inspection, or the like.

For example, in a configuration in which it is possible to determine whether or not the output specific data is normal by outputting specific data stored in the CGROM, the specific data to be output is each CGROM. By making it a unique value (for example, identification number, arrangement number, name of each CGROM), it is judged whether or not it is normal based on the specific output data, especially whether or not it is each CGROM. Can be facilitated. Further, in such a configuration, when the arrangement order and inspection order of each CGROM are predetermined, the output specific data is made to match the value indicating the arrangement order and inspection order of each CGROM. This makes it possible to easily determine whether or not the output specific data is normal, and in particular, whether or not each CGROM is arranged and inspected in a predetermined order.

In this embodiment, in the detailed check, the checksum of a specific area stored in the CGROMa to c is calculated and the result of the calculation is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. As a result, the liquid crystal display 51 may display a determination result of whether or not a value other than the calculated value of the checksum, for example, a value such as parity or a value such as parity matches a specific value. In such a configuration, whether or not the result of the operation is 0 by setting the value of the checksum, parity, etc. to a specific value (the last digit of the checksum is 0, the parity is 0, etc.). It is possible to determine whether or not the corresponding CGROM is normal only by the determination, and it is not necessary to store the data for comparison.

Further, in this embodiment, when the sub control unit 91 executes control for inspecting the stored contents of the CGROM 99a to c, characters are stored in the liquid crystal display 51 stored in the ROM 91b of the sub control unit 91. Information display data including the minimum image data required to display information such as and symbols is stored in the VRAM of the display control circuit 92, and the inspection result is displayed on the liquid crystal display using the information display data. Although it is configured to be displayed on the display 51, the information display data stored in the VRAM of the display control circuit 92 by the sub control unit 91 when executing the control for inspecting the stored contents of the CGROMs 99a to c is the liquid crystal. Any data required to display the inspection result on the display 51 may be sufficient, and when displaying the inspection result as an image, it may be image data or the like, and is displayed by characters, symbols, or the like. In this case, font data or the like may be used, or a combination thereof may be used.

When the sub-control unit 91 of this embodiment performs control for inspecting the stored contents of the CGROM 99a to c, the inspection result is obtained by the display control circuit 92 using the information display data stored in the ROM 91b. Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the information display data is the font data for displaying the characters constituting the simple check screen and the detailed check screen for displaying the inspection result, and thus the inspection result. Is easy to recognize the inspection result because it can be displayed in characters, and the inspection result more than the number of stored data is displayed, that is, the information more than the number of characters stored by the combination of multiple characters is displayed. Can be done.

In the sub-control unit 91 of this embodiment, data matching the inspection data stored in the specific addresses of the CGROMs 99a to c to be inspected is stored in the control ROM 91b as collation data. In the control for inspecting the stored contents of CGROM99a to c, it is inspected whether or not each CGROM99a to c is normal by comparing the collation data with the inspection data read from CGROM99a to c. That is, since the stored contents of each CGROM99a to c are inspected using the collation data stored outside the CGROMs 99a to c, it is normal even if the data stored in the CGROMs 99a to c is abnormal. Can be inspected.

In this embodiment, image data for displaying an image or the like on the liquid crystal display 51 is stored in a plurality of CGROMs 99a to c, and the sub-control unit 91 stores a plurality of CGROMs 99a to c in which the image data is stored. By reading the inspection data stored in each predetermined address and comparing it with the collation data of the corresponding CGROM stored in the control ROM 91b, whether or not each CGROM 99a to c is normal or not. Therefore, when any of the stored contents of CGROM99a to c is not normal, it is possible to identify which of the CGROMs 99a to c has an abnormality in the stored contents.

The liquid crystal display 51 of the present embodiment has a transmission area 51b in which each reel 2L, 2C, and 2R arranged on the back surface can be visually recognized as a part of a display area capable of displaying an image or the like, and is sub-controlled. When executing the control for inspecting the stored contents of the CGROMs 99a to c, the unit 91 displays a simple check screen and a detailed check screen for displaying the inspection results of the CGROMs 99a to c on a liquid crystal display by the display control circuit 92. Since the display is performed in a display area other than the transmission area 51b of the 51, the visibility of the inspection result displayed by the display control circuit 92 can be ensured.

When a predetermined condition is satisfied, the sub-control unit 91 of this embodiment has predetermined information about the sub-control unit 91 (in this embodiment, command history data stored in the RAM 91c, backup of the sub-control unit 91). Executes inspection information display control to display data (data to be backed up by the backup RAM 61, such as control status of the main control unit 41, game status, game history, error history, command history, etc.) on the liquid crystal display 51. When executing the inspection information display control, the information display data stored in the ROM 91b is stored in the VRAM, which is the work storage area of the display control circuit 92, under predetermined conditions. Predetermined information regarding the sub-control unit 91 according to the above is written as display instruction data in a predetermined register of the display control circuit 92, and a display command for displaying an image or the like on the liquid crystal display 51 based on the content of the display instruction data is displayed. By writing to a predetermined register of the control circuit 92, the display control circuit 92 uses the information display data stored in the ROM 91b to display predetermined information about the sub-control unit 91 according to the predetermined condition on the liquid crystal display. Since it is displayed on the 51, the information about the sub control unit 91 is displayed by using the image data included in the information display data stored in the ROM 91b of the sub control unit 91 instead of the image data stored in the CGROM 99a to c. Since the display is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, the information regarding the sub control unit 91 can be normally displayed even when the image data stored in the CGROMs 99a to c have an abnormality.

When the sub control unit 91 executes control for inspecting the stored contents of the CGROMs 99a to c, the display control circuit 92 uses the information display data stored in the ROM 91b to display the inspection result. Although the configuration is such that it can be displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, the storage means for inspecting the stored contents by the sub-control unit 91 is a storage means other than the CGROM, for example, SOUNDROM or the like in which sound data for effect is stored. Even in such a configuration, the sub-control unit 91 displays the inspection result on the liquid crystal display 51 using the information display data stored in the ROM 91b, so that the CG ROM 99a to c can be displayed. Even when an abnormality occurs in the image data stored in the sub-control unit 91, the information regarding the sub-control unit 91 can be normally displayed.

The sub-control unit 91 of this embodiment writes display instruction data that specifies the content to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 to a predetermined register of the display control circuit 92, and further, an image or the like is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 with the content of the display instruction data. By writing a display command to display the above to another predetermined register of the display control circuit 92, the display control circuit 92 uses the image data and the like stored in the CGROM 99a to c mounted on the CGROM board 99. It is possible to display an image or the like on the liquid crystal display 51 according to the display instruction data, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, control for inspecting the stored contents of the CGROM 99a to c is executed, and the inspection result is obtained. Is written in a predetermined register as display instruction data, so that the inspection result can be displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

In such a configuration, in the control for inspecting the stored contents of the CGROM 99a to c, when the inspection result is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, the inspection is not performed normally, or the liquid crystal display 51 itself or If a problem occurs in the display control circuit 92 itself, the inspection result will not be finally displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. In this case, it may be checked whether the inspection is performed normally or not. Or, it cannot be specified whether the display control circuit 92 has a problem.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the sub control unit 91 executes control for inspecting the stored contents of the CGROMs 99a to c when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and determines the result of the inspection as display instruction data. By writing to the register of, the inspection result can be displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and when the control for inspecting the stored contents of the CGROM 99a to c is executed, the effect effect LEDs 52a to c. , The reel LED 55, the effect LED 56a, and the checking LED 59 are controlled to be lit in a lighting mode (checking mode 1, checking mode 2) that can be visually recognized to be different from the lighting mode during normal production, so that the liquid crystal display 51 A predetermined mode in which the mode of the notification means provided separately from the normal mode is different from the normal mode (for example, a mode of blinking at a cycle faster or slower than that at normal startup, a mode of lighting in a color different from that at normal startup, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to recognize that the stored contents of the CGROMs 99a to c are being inspected by the sub-control unit 91. Therefore, when the inspection result is not finally displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, the sub-control unit 91 It can be estimated whether the inspection by the above is not performed normally or whether the liquid crystal display 51 or the display control circuit 92 has a problem.

In this embodiment, when the sub control unit 91 executes control for inspecting the stored contents of the CGROMs 99a to c, the effect effect LEDs 52a to c, the reel LEDs 55, the effect LED 56a, the checking LED 59, that is, the liquid crystal display. The notification means provided separately from the display 51 is controlled so that it can be visually recognized that it is different from the lighting mode at the time of normal production, but it is controlled when the control for inspecting the CGROMs 99a to c is executed. The notification means may be any as long as it is provided separately from the liquid crystal display 51. For example, a display means such as a liquid crystal display or a 7-segment display provided separately from the liquid crystal display 51, and light emission. It may be a light emitting means such as a lamp or an LED that changes the mode, a sound output means that changes the sound output mode, a movable member that changes the operation mode, or the like.

The sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment provides the effect LED 52a to c, the reel LED 55, the effect LED 56a, that is, the effect means used for the effect when executing the control for inspecting the stored contents of the CGROM 99a to c. Since the lighting is controlled in a lighting mode that can be visually recognized to be different from the lighting mode at the time of normal production (for example, a mode of blinking at a faster or slower cycle than at normal startup), the production means used for production is used. Therefore, it is possible to recognize that the inspection by the sub control unit 91 is being performed.

The sub-control unit 91 of this embodiment controls the simple check and the detailed check of the checking LED 59, that is, the notification means on the effect control board 90 when executing the control for inspecting the stored contents of the CGROMs 99a to c. Since it is controlled to a lighting mode in which it is possible to visually recognize that the above is being executed (for example, a lighting mode in which the LED 59 is constantly lit or blinks in red), only the board on which the LED 59 is mounted during the check, that is, the effect LEDs 52a to c are arranged. It is possible to perform the inspection by the sub control unit 91 while recognizing that the inspection by the sub control unit 91 is performed without using the front door 1b or the reel unit 2 in which the reel LED 55 is arranged. It will be possible.

In this embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 checks with the effect effect LEDs 52a to c, the reel LEDs 55, the effect LED 56a, that is, the effect means used for the effect, while controlling the simple check and the detailed check. The middle LED 59, that is, the notification means on the effect control board 90 is controlled in a predetermined lighting mode, but when the simple check and the detailed check are controlled, the effect effects LEDs 52a to c, the reel LEDs 55, At least one of the effect LED 56a and the checking LED 59 may be controlled in a predetermined lighting mode. With such a configuration, it is possible to recognize whether or not the inspection is performed by the sub control unit 91.

When the sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment controls to inspect the stored contents of the CGROMs 99a to c, the effect LED 52a to c, the reel LED 55, and the effect LED 56a are separated from each other by the LED drive circuits 93a to the effect LED 56a. Since the lighting is controlled via e in a lighting mode that can be visually recognized to be different from the lighting mode at the time of normal production (for example, a mode of blinking at a faster or slower cycle than at normal startup), the LED drive circuit 93a Even if a problem occurs in a part of ~ e, the notification means whose lighting is controlled via another system has a lighting mode different from the lighting mode at the time of normal production. Therefore, the sub control unit 91 causes the CGROM 99a to It is possible to recognize that the inspection of the stored contents of c is being performed.

When the sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment controls to inspect the stored contents of the CGROMs 99a to c, the effect effect LEDs 52a to c, the reel LEDs 55, which are connected via the LED drive circuits 93a to 93, It is visually recognized that the LED 56a for effect and the checking LED 59, which is connected to the effect LED 52a to c and the like by a separate system without going through the LED drive circuits 93a to e, are different from the lighting mode at the time of normal effect. Since the lighting is controlled in a possible lighting mode (for example, a mode of blinking at a faster or slower cycle than at normal startup), even if the LED drive circuits 93a to e have a problem, the LED drive circuits 93a to e Since the checking LED 59, which is controlled to be lit by a different system from the above, has a lighting mode different from the lighting mode at the time of normal production, it is recognized that the storage contents of the CGROMs 99a to c are inspected by the sub control unit 91. Can be made to.

Next, with respect to the data stored in the RAM 91c of the sub control unit 91 of the present embodiment and the error history display control in which the sub control unit 91 displays the history of occurrence of an error or the like on the liquid crystal display 51 based on the data, FIG. 29. It will be described with reference to FIG. 38.

As shown in FIG. 29, in the RAM 91c of the sub control unit 91 of this embodiment, the control state on the main control unit 41 side and the sub control unit 91 specified based on various commands received by the sub control unit 91. A control state data area for storing control state data related to a control state such as an effect, and a diagnostic data area for storing diagnostic data related to the diagnosis of the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91 are included. The diagnostic data area includes a command history data area in which command history data related to the history of commands received by the sub control unit 91 is stored, and an error on the main control unit 41 side specified by the sub control unit 91 based on the command. Etc., and an error history data area in which error history data related to an error detected by the sub-control unit 91 is stored is included.

The control state data area is an initialization target when an initialization condition is satisfied in the activation process (sub) of the sub control unit 91, which will be described later, and as an initialization condition, a setting change state is started based on a setting command. It is initialized when either of the conditions of when it is detected (when the setting change is detected) and when an abnormality in the RAM 91c of the sub control unit 91 is detected (when the sub RAM is abnormal) is satisfied. Further, the control state data area is not directly initialized when an abnormality in the RAM 41c on the main control unit 41 side is detected based on an error command (when the main RAM is abnormal), but the main control When the RAM 41c of the unit 41 is abnormal, an error notification is performed by the sub control unit 91 to prompt the user to perform a setting change operation, and it is detected that the setting change state is started by performing the setting change operation. And is indirectly initialized. Further, the control state data area is not an initialization target and is not initialized when the normal return of the main control unit 41 is detected based on the return command and after that (when the main return is detected). On the other hand, the diagnostic data area is to be initialized regardless of any of the conditions for initializing the control state data area (when setting change is detected, when sub RAM is abnormal, when main RAM is abnormal, when main return is detected). The command history data area and the error history data area included in the diagnostic data area are not initialized by the sub-control unit 91.

Further, the control state data area, the command history data area and the error history data area included in the diagnostic data area are backup targets when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped (when the power is cut off), and the power is cut off. When the voltage drop signal from the detection circuit 98 is detected, the control state data stored in the control state data area, the command history data and the error history data stored in the diagnostic data area are the sub-control unit 91. Is duplicated in the storage area of the backup RAM 61 and is retained as backup data.

Further, the control state data is the target of the destruction determination for determining whether or not the backup data backed up in the backup RAM 61 is normal, and the backup data is determined by the destruction determination executed in the activation process (sub) described later. While the control status data in the data is referenced, the command history data and error history data are not subject to the destruction judgment of the backup data, and the command history data and error history data in the backup data are referred to in the destruction judgment. There is no.

Further, the command history data area is set to a capacity capable of recording a larger number of commands (100 in this embodiment) than the maximum number that can be transmitted from the main control unit 41 to the sub control unit 91 in at least one game. The number of error history data areas is larger than the number of errors that may occur in the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91 during a business period of at least one day (in this embodiment, about three days). A capacity that can record errors (100) that can be assumed during the business period is set.

Next, the activation process (sub) executed by the sub control unit 91 will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 30, when the sub control unit 91 is activated by inputting a reset signal from the reset circuit 95, it executes an activation process (sub), and first, the built-in device, peripheral IC, interrupt mode, and so on. Initialize the stack pointer and the like (Sp1). After that, access to the RAM 91c is permitted (Sp2), and all the usable areas of the RAM 91c are initialized (Sp3).

Then, with reference to the predetermined area of the backup RAM 61, the checksum of the control state data included in the backup data stored in the backup RAM 61 is calculated (Sp4). After that, the destruction determination data for destruction determination included in the backup data is acquired, and whether or not the checksum calculation result in Sp4 matches the destruction determination data is compared (Sp5), and the comparison results match. Whether or not it is determined (Sp6).

In the step of Sp6, when it is determined that the check sum calculation result of the control state data included in the backup data matches the destruction determination data, that is, when it is determined that the backup data is not destroyed and is normal, the backup is backed up. The control state data included in the data is duplicated and set in the control state data area of the RAM 91c (Sp7), and the control state data area of the RAM 91c is returned to the state before the power failure.

Then, after setting the control state data of the backup data in the RAM 91c in the step of Sp7, or when it is determined in the step of Sp6 that the check sum calculation result does not match the destruction determination data, the backup data of the backup RAM 61 is used. By duplicating the included command history data to the command history data area of the RAM 91c and replicating the error history data included in the backup data to the error history data area of the RAM 91c, the diagnostic data included in the backup data can be used as the diagnostic data of the RAM 91c. The area is set (Sp8) to restore the diagnostic data area of the RAM 91c to the state before the power failure.

After that, all the backup data of the backup RAM 61 is initialized (Sp9), and one of the error command, the setting command (start), and the return command is received from the main control unit 41 (Sp10-12), or the startup process (sub). ) Waits until a predetermined time elapses (Sp13).

If it is determined that an error command has been received in the step of Sp10, the process proceeds to the step of Sp17 to notify that the error state is being controlled on the main control unit 41 side as a control pattern of each effect device. After setting the error notification pattern in the predetermined area of the RAM 91c, the process proceeds to the step of Sp18.

If it is determined that the setting command (start) has been received in the step of Sp11, the process proceeds to the step of Sp15, and the RAM91c is controlled in response to the initialization of the RAM41c with the setting change on the main control unit 41 side. After initializing the state data area (Sp15), as a control pattern of each effect device, the setting changing notification pattern for notifying that the setting change state is being controlled on the main control unit 41 side is set to the predetermined area of the RAM 91c. (Sp16). Then, the process proceeds to the step of Sp18.

When it is determined that the return command has been received in the step of Sp12, the stored content of the RAM 91c is maintained as the stored content set in the steps of Sp3 to Sp8, that is, the control pattern of each effect device is cut off. The control pattern set at that time is maintained, and the process proceeds to the step of Sp18.

In the step of Sp18, the return process for resuming the control of each effect device based on the control state data of the RAM 91c is executed, and the output of each effect device in the control pattern set by the steps of Sp3 to Sp8, Sp16, and Sp17 is executed. To start. Further, in the return process, an error history recording process described later is executed, and a process of adding to the error history data that the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, that is, that the power is turned on is performed. After that, the effect is controlled according to the progress of the game based on the command or the like received from the main control unit 41.

It is not determined that any of the error command, setting command (start), and return command has been received in the steps Sp10 to Sp12, and the predetermined time has passed since the start processing (sub) was started in the step Sp13. If it is determined that the elapse has passed, the process proceeds to the step of Sp14, the state shifts to the inspection mode, and as described above, the control of the simple check for inspecting the stored contents of the CGROMs 99a to c mounted on the CGROM board 99 is controlled. Start. After the simple check control is started, the startup process (sub) is executed from the beginning by being restarted.

As described above, when the sub control unit 91 determines that the backup data is normal after initializing all the areas of the RAM 91c in the start processing (sub), the control state data included in the backup data is set to the RAM 91c. By setting in the control state data area of, if the backup data is normal, it is possible to retain the control state data before the power failure even after the recovery from the power failure. On the other hand, if it is determined that the backup data is not normal, the backup data is not normal by initializing all of the backup data without setting the control state data included in the backup data in the control state data area of the RAM 91c. In this case, the control state data before the power failure is not retained after the recovery from the power failure.

Further, the sub control unit 91 determines that the backup data is normal in the startup process (sub), sets the control state data included in the backup data in the control state data area of the RAM 91c, and then initializes all the backup data. After that, when the setting command (start) is received, the control state data area of the RAM 91c is initialized so that the stored contents of the RAM 41c are initialized along with the setting change on the main control unit 41 side. , The control status data before the power failure is not retained.

Further, after initializing all the areas of the RAM 91c in the start processing (sub), the sub control unit 91 diagnoses the diagnostic data included in the backup data in the RAM 91c regardless of whether the backup data is normal or not. By initializing all the backup data after setting it in the data area, the diagnostic data before the power failure, that is, the command history, even after recovering from the power failure, regardless of whether the backup data is normal or not. Data and error history data are retained.

Further, when the sub control unit 91 receives a setting command (start) as an initialization condition of the RAM 91c in the start processing (sub), the sub control unit 91 initializes only the control state data area of the RAM 91c and initializes the diagnostic data area. By not converting the data, regardless of whether the stored contents of the RAM 41c are initialized due to the setting change on the main control unit 41 side, the diagnostic data before the power failure, that is, the command history, even after the recovery from the power failure. Data and error history data are retained.

Next, the command history recording process executed every time the sub-control unit 91 receives a command to create the command history data will be described with reference to FIG. 31.

As described above, the sub control unit 91 generates an interrupt when receiving a command by the timer interrupt process (sub), acquires the command transmitted from the main control unit 41, and stores the command in the buffer. Is executed, the command history recording process is executed in the command reception interrupt process, and the command history data is created in the command history data area of the RAM 91c.

As shown in FIG. 31, in the command history recording process, when it is determined that a command has been received (Sq1), the predetermined area in the diagnostic data area of the RAM 91c is referred to in the area in the command history data area. Therefore, the recording address 1 that can specify the area for recording the information of the newly received command is acquired (Sq2).

Then, based on the recording address 1 acquired in the step of Sq2, a predetermined area (the area of the recording address 1) in the command history data area is designated, and a newly received command (including the type and contents) is specified. Is recorded (Sq3). After that, the recording address 1 in the diagnostic data area referred to in the step of Sq2 is updated to the next address by one (Sq4), and the updated recording address 1 in the diagnostic data area is the command history data. It is determined whether or not it is the final value of the area (Sq5), and if the updated recording address 1 is the final value, the recording address 1 is set as the initial value to the first value of the command history data area. Set (Sq6), end the command history recording process, and return to the command reception interrupt process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the step of Sq5 that the updated recording address 1 has not reached the final value, the updated recording address 1 is maintained as it is, the command history recording process is terminated, and the command is executed. Return to reception interrupt processing.

In this way, the sub-control unit 91 creates command history data by executing command history recording processing each time a command is received and recording the received command in the command history data area.

Further, in the command history recording process, the sub-control unit 91 sequentially updates the recording address 1 and shifts the recording address 1 from the first address to the last address of the command history data area designated by the recording address 1. Command history data is created by recording received commands, and the command history data area, that is, the area from the first address to the last address of the command history data area can be received in one game. Since the capacity for recording more than the number of commands (100 in this embodiment) is set, the command history recording process is executed and received when the command history recording process is executed. From the command that was executed, 100 commands received before that are recorded as command history data.

Further, the sub-control unit 91 sequentially updates the recording address 1 in the command history recording process, and when the updated recording address 1 reaches the final value of the command history data area, the sub-control unit 91 initially resets the recording address 1. The value is set to the first value in the command history data area, and the received command is recorded in the area specified by the recording address 1 to create command history data, and the command history data recording address 1 Is stored in the diagnostic data area to specify the reception order of the commands recorded in the command history data based on the recording address 1, that is, the latest recorded last based on the recording address 1. To specify the command (command of the address immediately before the recording address 1) and to refer to the addresses before the recording address 1 one by one (the first address of the command history data area has been reached). In this case, the commands received in the past can be specified retroactively in the order in which they were received (referring one by one from the address immediately before the last address).

By recording the received command and the reception number (for example, a value that is sequentially updated in the range of 0 to 99) as a set, the reception order of the commands recorded in the command history data is specified. It may be a possible configuration.

Next, the error history recording process executed by the sub control unit 91 in the timer interrupt process (sub) for creating the error history data will be described with reference to FIG. 32.

The sub control unit 91 executes error history recording processing in timer interrupt processing (sub), recovery processing in start processing (sub), and power interruption processing (sub), and transfers command history data to the error history data area of RAM 91c. create.

As shown in FIG. 32, in the error history recording process, whether or not an error command is received from the main control unit 41 (Sr1), whether or not a setting command (start) is received (Sr2), and based on a door command. The sub-control unit 91 detects a sub-error such as whether or not the front door 1b is detected to be opened or closed (Sr3), an abnormality in the RAM 91c of the sub-control unit 91, or a command reception abnormality (communication error). Whether or not the game history has been cleared (Sr4), whether or not the game history held by the sub-control unit 91 has been cleared by the game history clearing operation described later (Sr5), and when the power is turned on, that is, the activation process (sub) is being executed. It is determined whether or not (Sr6), that is, whether or not the power is turned off, that is, whether or not the power cutoff process (sub) is being executed (Sr7).

If it is determined in the steps Sr1 to Sr7 that an event corresponding to these has been detected, the process proceeds to the step Sr8, the predetermined area in the diagnostic data area of the RAM 91c is referred to, and the area in the error history data area is used. Therefore, the recording address 2 that can specify the area for recording the newly detected error and other information is acquired, and the current time information (information including the date and time) is obtained based on the output of the clock device 97. ) Is acquired (Sr9). Then, based on the recording address 2 acquired in the step of Sr8, a predetermined area (the area of the recording address 2) in the error history data area is designated, and the current time information acquired in the step of Sr9 is recorded. At the same time, the types of errors and the like newly detected in the steps Sr1 to Sr7 (see FIG. 33) are recorded (Sr10).

After recording the type of newly detected error or the like in the error history data area in Sr10, the recording address 2 in the diagnostic data area referred to in the step of Sq8 is updated to the next address by one. (Sr11), it is determined whether or not the updated recording address 2 in the diagnostic data area is the final value of the error history data area (Sr12), and the updated recording address 2 is the final value. Is set to the first value of the error history data area with the recording address 2 as the initial value (Sr13), the error history recording process is terminated, and the process returns to the caller's process. On the other hand, if it is determined in the step of Sr12 that the updated recording address 2 has not reached the final value, the updated recording address 2 is maintained as it is, and the error history recording process is terminated and called. Return to the original process.

As shown in FIG. 33, the types of errors to be recorded in the RAM 91c in the step of Sr9 are overflow error (E1), hopper empty error (E2), medal jam error (E3), medal payout error (E4), and medal insertion. Error (E5), Reel rotation error (E6), Abnormal winning error (E7), RAM error (E8), Setting change error, Error cancellation, RAM clear (setting change), Door open, Door close, Communication error, Sub control Includes part error, game history clear, sub-backup error, power on, power off.

Then, in the step of Sr1, when it is determined that the error command has been received, the overflow error (E1) and the hopper empty error (E2) corresponding to the error specified based on the received error command are used as the types of errors and the like. , Medal jam error (E3), Medal payout error (E4), Medal insertion error (E5), Reel rotation error (E6), Abnormal winning error (E7), RAM error (E8), Setting change error, Error cancellation Is set in the RAM 91c. Further, when it is determined that the setting command (start) has been received in the step of Sr2, RAM clear (setting change) is set in the RAM 91c as a type of error or the like. Further, when it is determined in the step of Sr3 that the front door 1b has been opened or closed based on the door command, and it is detected that the front door 1b has been opened, the case has been detected. While the door opening is recorded as the type of error or the like, when it is detected that the front door 1b is closed, the door closure is recorded as the type of error or the like. If it is determined that a sub-error has been detected in the step of Sr4, a communication error corresponding to the type of sub-error detected by the sub-control unit 91 (command in the sub-control unit 91) is used as the type of error or the like. (Reception error), sub-control unit error (error related to RAM 91c), backup error (error related to backup RAM 61) are recorded. Further, when it is determined in the step of Sr5 that the game history has been cleared, the game history clear is recorded as a type of error or the like. If it is determined in the step of Sr6 that the power is on, the power on is recorded as a type of error or the like. Further, when it is determined in the step of Sr7 that the power is off, the power off is recorded as a type of error or the like.

In this way, the sub control unit 91 executes the error history recording process in the timer interrupt process (sub), the return process in the start process (sub), and the power failure process (sub), and corresponds to the timing of each process. When an error or the like has occurred, the error history data is created by recording the type of the error or the like corresponding to the error history data area of the RAM 91c.

Further, in the error history recording process, the sub-control unit 91 sequentially updates the recording address 2 and sets the area from the first address to the last address of the error history data area designated by the recording address 2. Error history data is created by recording the type of the corresponding error, etc., and the error history data area, that is, the area from the first address to the last address of the error history data area is a predetermined business. Records more errors than the number of errors that may occur in the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91 during the period (in this embodiment, 100 errors that can be expected in a business period of about 3 days). Since the possible capacity is set, the error history recording process is executed, and 100 errors that occurred before that from the errors that occurred when the error history recording process was executed. Etc. are recorded as error history data.

Further, the sub-control unit 91 sequentially updates the recording address 2 in the error history recording process, and when the updated recording address 2 reaches the final value of the error history data area, the recording address 2 is initially initialized. The value is set to the first value in the error history data area, and the type of error or the like is recorded in the area specified by the recording address 2 to create error history data, and the error history data recording address. By storing 2 in the diagnostic data area, the order of the errors etc. recorded in the error history data is specified based on the recording address 2, that is, the last recorded based on the recording address 2. Identify the latest error, etc. (error, etc. of the address immediately before the recording address 2), and refer to the addresses before the recording address 2 one by one (the first address of the error history data area). When the error is reached, refer to the address immediately before the last address one by one), and it is possible to identify the error or the like that occurred in the past by going back in the order of occurrence.

Further, when the sub-control unit 1 records the type of an error or the like in the error history data area designated by the recording address 2 in the error history recording process, the sub-control unit 1 stores the current time information acquired by the clock device 97 in the same area. By recording them together, it is possible to specify the time when each error or the like recorded in the error history data has occurred.

Next, the history display control in which the sub control unit 91 displays the contents of the command history data and the error history data on the liquid crystal display 51 when a predetermined output condition is satisfied will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 38.

The sub control unit 91 determines whether or not control during the game is performed on the main control unit 41 side based on the reception status of the command, and the control during the game is not performed on the main control unit 41 side. That is, when it is determined that the game is not in progress, the first history display condition (the front door 1b is in the open state (except during the error state and after the error state)) is set as a predetermined output condition, and the setting key switch 37 is used. The on state is detected) or the second history display condition (the front door 1b is in the open state (except during the error state and after the error state)), and the effect switch 56 is on for a predetermined time (this embodiment). Then, when the fact that it was detected for 5 seconds) is satisfied, the history display control is started. The error state in the first history display condition and the second history display condition is the period from the start of the error state control on the main control unit 41 side to the end of the error state control. The term after the error state is the period from the end of the control of the error state on the main control unit 41 side to the closing of the front door 1b at least once. Further, during the game, a predetermined number of bets (3 or 2 in this embodiment) is set, and the third stop operation is performed from the time when the start switch 7 is operated. This is the period until all reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped. When the third stop operation is performed and all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped, and the combination of the re-game combinations is stopped and the re-game is given, all the reels 2L, In the period from the stop of 2C and 2R to the operation of the start switch 7, it may not be determined whether or not the predetermined output condition is satisfied, and the history display control may not be executed. However, the configuration may be such that it is possible to determine whether or not a predetermined output condition is satisfied and execute the history display control.

In the history display control, the detailed history display for displaying all the contents included in the above-mentioned error history data on the liquid crystal display 51 and the above-mentioned error history data according to the operation mode detected after the history display control is started. A simple history display that displays only a part of specific contents on the liquid crystal display 51, a command history display that displays all the contents included in the above-mentioned command history data on the liquid crystal display 51, and a sub-control unit 91 that displays the RAM 91c. It is possible to clear the game history by deleting the game history information (history of information related to the game such as RB, BB, AT winning count, RB, BB, number of games after AT, number of payout medals, etc.) recorded in. be.

As shown in FIG. 33, in the detailed history display, as information to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, overflow error (E1), hopper empty error (E2), medal jam error (E3), and medal payout included in the error history data. Error (E4), medal insertion error (E5), reel rotation error (E6), abnormal winning error (E7), RAM error (E8), setting change error, error cancellation, RAM clear (setting change), door open, door Includes information on closure, communication error, sub-control unit error, game history clear, sub-backup error, power on, power off, and recorded time information such as each error. On the other hand, in the simple history display, as information to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, among the contents included in the error history data, an overflow error (E1), a hopper empty error (E2), a medal jam error (E3), and a reel rotation error. (E6), including information on error cancellation, sub-backup error, power on, power off, and recorded time information such as each error, other medal payout error (E4), medal insertion error (E5), abnormal winning error (E7), RAM error (E8), setting change error, RAM clear (setting change), door open, door close, communication error, sub-control unit error, game history clear information is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. Has been excluded from.

As shown in FIG. 34, when the first history display condition is satisfied, that is, after the main control unit 41 starts controlling the error state and the error state, the sub control unit 91 starts controlling the error state. In a period other than the period from the end of the control of the error state to the closing of the front door 1b, the front door 1b is opened and the setting key switch 37 is turned on, so that the history display control is performed. In the display area 51a of the liquid crystal display 51, the history display area (see FIG. 34A) provided on the upper side of the see-through window 3 of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is designated. History display selection screen 1 suggesting that the above-mentioned detailed history display, simple history display, command history display, and game history clear can be performed according to the operation mode (long press and short press of the effect button). (See FIG. 34 (b)) is displayed. In the history display control executed when the first history display condition is satisfied, it is possible to perform any of detailed history display, simple history display, command history display, and game history clear by an operation according to a predetermined operation mode. ..

As shown in FIG. 35A, in the history display control, when the history display selection screen 1 is displayed because the first history display condition is satisfied, the effect switch 56 is briefly pressed (this embodiment). Then, by operating in the operation mode of pressing less than 1), the simple history display is selected (in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 35 (a), the triangular images are located on the left and right of the simple history display. By operating the effect switch 56 in the operation mode of pressing and holding (pressing for 1 second or longer in this embodiment), the history display selection screen 1 displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 can be simply historyed. Control to switch to the display screen.

As shown in FIG. 35B, after switching the display of the liquid crystal display 51 to the simple history display screen, the sub-control unit 91 refers to the error history data of the RAM 91c, and an error corresponding to the simple history display, etc. (See FIG. 33) and the time information corresponding to the error or the like are sequentially displayed on the simple history display screen by a predetermined number (10 sets in this embodiment) so that the order in which the error or the like is recorded can be specified. Further, the current time information (current date and time) specified based on the output of the clock device 97 is displayed on the simple history display screen. In this state, when it is detected that the effect switch 56 is pressed and held, the simple history display screen is controlled to be switched to the history display selection screen 1 (returns to the menu), while the effect switch 56 is used. When it is detected that the button has been pressed for a short time, the displayed error and time information are controlled to be switched to the next predetermined number of contents (page feed).

As shown in FIG. 36A, in the history display control, when the history display selection screen 1 is displayed because the first history display condition is satisfied, the effect switch 56 is pressed for a short time. By operating, the effect switch 56 is lengthened in a state where the detailed history display is selected (in this embodiment, the triangular images are located on the left and right of the detailed history display as shown in FIG. 36 (a)). By operating the push operation mode, the history display selection screen 1 displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 is controlled to be switched to the detailed history display screen.

As shown in FIG. 36B, after switching the display of the liquid crystal display 51 to the detailed history display screen, the sub-control unit 91 refers to the error history data of the RAM 91c, and causes an error corresponding to the detailed history display. (See FIG. 33) and the time information corresponding to the error or the like are sequentially displayed on the detailed history display screen by a predetermined number (15 sets in this embodiment) so that the order in which the error or the like is recorded can be specified. Further, the current time information (current date and time) specified based on the output of the clock device 97 is displayed on the detailed history display screen. In this state, when it is detected that the effect switch 56 is pressed and held, the detailed history display screen is controlled to be switched to the history display selection screen 1 (returns to the menu), while the effect switch 56 is used. When it is detected that the button has been pressed for a short time, the displayed error and time information are controlled to be switched to the next predetermined number of contents (page feed).

As shown in FIG. 37 (a), in the history display control, when the history display selection screen 1 is displayed because the first history display condition is satisfied, the effect switch 56 is pressed for a short time. By operating, the effect switch 56 is lengthened in a state where the command history display is selected (in this embodiment, the triangular images are located on the left and right of the command history display as shown in FIG. 37 (a)). By operating the push operation mode, the history display selection screen 1 displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 is controlled to be switched to the command history display screen.

As shown in FIG. 37B, after switching the display of the liquid crystal display 51 to the command history display screen, the sub-control unit 91 refers to the command history data of the RAM 91c and displays all the recorded commands. , The order in which the commands are recorded is displayed on the command history display screen so that it can be specified. Further, the current time information (current date and time) specified based on the output of the clock device 97 is displayed on the command history display screen. In addition, all the commands recorded in the command history data are displayed on the command history display screen with a two-dimensional code that can be specified together with the order in which the commands are recorded.

As shown in FIG. 38, when the second history display condition is satisfied, that is, after the main control unit 41 starts controlling the error state and the error state, the sub control unit 91 starts controlling the error state. In a period other than the period from the end of the control of the error state to the closing of the front door 1b, the front door 1b is set to the open state, and the effect switch 56 is pressed and held for a predetermined time (this implementation). In the example, the operation is performed in the on state for 5 seconds), and when the history display control is started, the history display area (see FIG. 34 (a)) of the liquid crystal display 51 is designated. The history display selection screen 2 (see FIG. 38 (a)) suggesting that the above-mentioned simple history display can be performed is displayed depending on the operation mode (long press of the effect button). In the history display control executed when the second history display condition is satisfied, it is possible to perform only a simple history display by an operation according to a predetermined operation mode. On the history display selection screen 2, the display modes of the detailed history display, the command history display, and the game history clear, which cannot be performed as the history display control, are different from the display mode of the simple history display (in this embodiment, the color of the characters is changed. By displaying in the inverted display mode), it is suggested that it is impossible to select and perform these detailed history display, command history display, and game history clear.

As shown in FIG. 38 (a), when the history display selection screen 2 is displayed because the second history display condition is satisfied, the effect switch 56 is pressed and held for 1 second or longer (in this embodiment, 1 second or longer). By operating in the operation mode of pressing over), the history display selection screen displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 is controlled to be switched to the simple history display screen.

As shown in FIG. 38 (b), after switching from the history display selection screen 2 to the simple history display screen, the sub-control unit 91 switches from the history display selection screen 2 to the simple history display screen, as in the case of switching to the simple history display screen. It is controlled to display the error etc. corresponding to the simple history display (see FIG. 33), the time information corresponding to the error etc., and the current time information (current date and time) on the simple history display screen.

As described above, the sub-control unit 91 is in the first history display condition (the front door 1b is in the open state (except during the error state and after the error state)) as a predetermined output condition, and the setting key switch 37 is in the ON state. Is detected), the history of the received command can be displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 by executing the history display control.

Further, the sub-control unit 91 can display the command history display screen including the command history data recorded in the command history data area of the RAM 91c on the liquid crystal display 51 when a predetermined output condition is satisfied. Yes, on the command history display screen, all commands recorded as command history data are displayed so that the order in which the command is recorded, that is, the order in which the command is received can be specified.

Further, when a predetermined output condition is satisfied, the sub-control unit 91 displays the command history display screen including the command history data recorded in the command history data area of the RAM 91c in the display area 51a of the liquid crystal display 51. The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are displayed in a region on the upper side of the fluoroscopic window 3, that is, a region other than the transmission region 51b.

Further, the sub control unit 91 detects that the first history display condition (the front door 1b is in the open state (except during the error state and after the error state)) and the setting key switch 37 is on as a predetermined output condition. The second history display condition (the front door 1b is in the open state (except during the error state and after the error state)), and the effect switch 56 is on for a predetermined time (5 seconds in this embodiment). ) Is satisfied, the history of errors and the like that have occurred in the slot machine 1 can be displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 by executing the history display control.

Further, the sub-control unit 91 can display the detailed history display screen by executing the history display control when the first history display condition is satisfied as a predetermined output condition. On the history display screen, the first event included in the error history data (overflow error (E1), hopper empty error (E2), medal jam error (E3), medal payout error (E4), medal insertion error (E5), reel Rotation error (E6), abnormal winning error (E7), RAM error (E8), setting change error, error cancellation, RAM clear (setting change), door open, door close, communication error, sub control unit error, game history clear , Sub backup error, power on, power off) is displayed, but when the second history display condition is satisfied, the simple history display screen can be displayed by executing the history display control. It is possible, and on the simple history display screen, the second event included in the error history data (overflow error (E1), hopper empty error (E2), medal jam error (E3), reel rotation error (E6), error cancellation, Display including sub-backup error, power on, power off).

In the main control unit 41 of this embodiment, it is possible to shift to the setting change state by operating the setting key switch 37 with a specific key. Generally, in a store or the like where the slot machine 1 is installed, the specific setting is specified. Only a store clerk or the like who possesses the key can operate the setting key switch 37, and other persons cannot operate the setting key switch 37. In such a configuration, tentatively, in the history display control, on the simple history display screen or the detailed history display screen, information related to operating the setting key switch 37, for example, RAM error (E8), setting change error, RAM clear. When (setting change), door opening, door closing, etc. are displayed, there is a possibility that a setting change has been made that can only be performed by a clerk who possesses a specific key, or the setting key switch 37 is pressed. It becomes possible to guess that there is a possibility of operation. On the other hand, when the second history display condition is satisfied, that is, when the error history data is displayed without operating the setting key switch 37, the sub control unit 91 causes a RAM error (E8) and changes the setting. Information regarding errors, RAM clear (setting change), door opening, and door closing is excluded from the information displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

The sub control unit 91 of this embodiment can control the effect in response to the reception of a command from the main control unit 41, and holds data used for controlling the effect and data including a history of receiving the command. Then, when a predetermined output condition is satisfied, the command reception history is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

In such a configuration, if an abnormality is detected in the data used by the sub-control unit 91 for controlling the effect, the data held by the sub-control unit 91 is initialized, and the abnormality occurs due to the reception of the command. Will not be able to be specified.

On the other hand, the sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment includes a RAM 91c capable of storing control state data which is data used for controlling the effect and command history data which is data of the history of receiving commands, and the RAM 91c. Is provided with a control state data area capable of storing control state data as a first storage area and a command history data area capable of storing command history data as a second storage area. When the output condition is satisfied, the contents of the command history data stored in the command history data area can be displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped. , The control state data stored in the first storage area and the command history data stored in the second storage area are held by the backup RAM 61 capable of holding the stored data even when the power supply is stopped. After that, when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, it is determined whether or not the initialization condition is satisfied, and when it is determined that the initialization condition is satisfied, the data is held by the backup RAM 61. Since the command history data is retained without being initialized while the control state data is initialized among the stored data, even if the initialization condition is satisfied and the data held by the backup RAM 61 is initialized. , It is possible to specify the reception status of the command before the initialization condition is satisfied.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 controls the game, while the sub control unit 91 controls the effect according to the command received from the main control unit 41. The first control means for controlling may transmit an instruction such as a command, and the second control means for receiving the command or the like may perform predetermined control based on the command or the like, for example, the first. The main control unit 41 as the control means of the first controls the game and the effect, and the sub control unit 91 as the second control means performs some control based on the command transmitted from the first control means. It may be a configuration that is. In such a configuration, the data used for control by the second control means and the history data of the command from the first control means are held by the holding means capable of holding the stored data even when the power supply is stopped. When it is held and it is determined that the initialization condition is satisfied, the data used for control by the second control means among the data held by the holding means is initialized, while the command history data is initialized. Even if the initialization condition is satisfied and the data held by the holding means is initialized, the reception status of the command before the initialization condition is satisfied is specified. can do.

Further, in the present embodiment, the sub control unit 91 is a storage means separate from the RAM 91c included in the sub control unit 91, and is a backup RAM 61 in which data is held even if the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped. Although the configuration is such that the stored data of the RAM 91c can be retained, the RAM 91c itself may be configured to be capable of retaining the stored data even if the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped.

Further, in the present embodiment, the sub control unit 91 stores the data stored in the RAM 91c in the RAM 91c with respect to the backup RAM 61 in which the data is held even if the power supply is stopped separately from the RAM 91c. It is configured to hold the stored data, and when the initialization condition is satisfied when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, the control state data among the data stored in the backup RAM 61 is stored in the RAM 91c. By initializing without duplicating to, the control state data stored in the RAM 91c before the power supply is stopped is not restored to the RAM 91c, but when the initialization condition is satisfied, the backup RAM 61 is used. By not replicating and initializing the control state data among the stored data to the RAM 91c, the control state data stored in the RAM 91c may not be returned to the RAM 91c before the power supply is stopped.

Further, in the present embodiment, the sub control unit 91 is configured to display the contents of the command history data stored in the command history data area on the liquid crystal display 51 when a predetermined output condition is satisfied. The configuration is such that the content of the history data is displayed as a character string and a two-dimensional coded image, but the content of the command history data may be output by an electromagnetic signal or the like that can be specified by an external device.

The sub-control unit 91 of this embodiment is configured to display the contents of the command history data stored in the command history data area on the liquid crystal display 51 when a predetermined output condition is satisfied. When displaying the contents on the liquid crystal display 51, the commands included in the command history data are displayed in the order in which they are received. Therefore, the order in which the sub-control unit 91 receives the commands from the contents displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 is displayed. Can be identified.

The sub-control unit 91 of this embodiment executes a command history recording process each time a command is received from the main control unit 41, and records the history of the received command in the command history data area of the RAM 91c. Since the data area is set to a capacity capable of recording a larger number of commands (100 in this embodiment) than the maximum number that can be transmitted from the main control unit 41 to the sub control unit 91 in at least one unit of the game. It is possible to specify the reception status of the command received from the main control unit 41 over one or more units of the game.

The sub-control unit 91 of this embodiment can execute a destruction determination for determining whether or not the data held by the backup RAM 61 is normal when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started. It is determined whether or not the data held by the backup RAM 61 is normal based on the control state data among the data held by the backup RAM 61, that is, based on the data excluding the command history data, and the data is held by the backup RAM 61. When it is determined that the data held by the backup RAM 61 is not normal, the control state data among the data held by the backup RAM 61 is initialized. Therefore, in the destruction determination, the sub-control unit 91 among the data held by the backup RAM 61 determines. Since the data other than the control state data used for controlling the effect is not normal, it is not necessary to make an unnecessary determination that the data held by the backup RAM 61 is not normal.

The backup RAM 61 and the backup battery 62 are mounted on the effect control board 90 on which the main control unit 41 and the RAM 91c of this embodiment are mounted, and the backup RAM 61 is the backup RAM 61 by the power supplied from the backup battery 62. Since it is possible to retain the data stored in the backup RAM 61, the data stored in the backup RAM 61 can be retained even when the effect control board 90 is removed from the slot machine 1 main body.

In this embodiment, the storage contents of the RAM 91c can be held by the backup RAM 61 that stores the stored contents of the RAM 91c even if the power supply to the slot machine 1 separate from the RAM 91c is stopped. However, the RAM 91c itself can be stored in the slot machine. A configuration may be used in which the stored data can be retained even if the power supply to 1 is stopped. In such a configuration, for example, a backup battery capable of supplying power to the RAM 91c is used as a production control board 90. By providing the effect control board 90 in the slot machine 1, the data stored in the RAM 91c itself can be retained even when the effect control board 90 is removed from the slot machine 1 main body.

Since the backup RAM 61 of the present embodiment has a configuration capable of holding the data stored by the electric power supplied from the backup battery 62, it is stored by the electric power supplied from a power discharge means other than the battery, for example, a capacitor or the like. Compared to a configuration that can retain data, a large amount of data can be retained for a long time.

In this embodiment, the backup RAM 61 has a configuration that can be held by the electric power supplied from the backup battery 62, but the means for supplying the electric power to the backup RAM 61 may be a power discharging means such as a capacitor other than the battery. good.

Further, in this embodiment, as a storage means for holding backup data when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped, a backup RAM 61 capable of holding the stored contents by being supplied with power from the backup battery 62 is provided. Although it is a configuration to be used, a non-volatile storage means such as EEPROM may be used as the storage means. With such a configuration, when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped, the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped. Acup data can be retained without using a power supply means for supplying power to the storage means.

The sub-control unit 91 of this embodiment has a configuration capable of displaying the contents of the command history data stored in the command history data area of the RAM 91c on the liquid crystal display 51 when a predetermined output condition is satisfied. When displaying the contents of the command history data on the liquid crystal display 51, the contents of the command history data are displayed in the display area 51a other than the transmission area 51b in the liquid crystal display 51, so that the contents are displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. It is possible to ensure the visibility of the contents of the command history data.

The sub-control unit 91 of this embodiment can display the occurrence history of events related to the slot machine 1, such as an error and the open / closed state of the front door 1b, on the liquid crystal display 51 when a predetermined output condition is satisfied. It is a composition.

In such a configuration, when displaying the occurrence history of a predetermined event related to the slot machine 1, it is necessary to limit viewing to some people depending on the type of event, for example, an event related to a setting change. If browsing is restricted for all events, troublesome operations will be required even when displaying the occurrence history of events of relatively low importance.

On the other hand, the sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment stores the occurrence history of a plurality of types of events related to the slot machine 1 in the RAM 91c as error history data, and when a predetermined output condition is satisfied, the error history data The configuration is such that the contents can be displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and as the first operation, it is stored in the RAM 91c when a predetermined output condition including the operation of the setting key switch 37 is satisfied. While executing the detailed history display for displaying the occurrence history of the first type of event on the liquid crystal display 51 among the existing error history data, as the second operation, the effect switch 56 is operated by a long press operation mode. When a predetermined output condition including the above is satisfied, a simple history display is executed in which the occurrence history of the second type of event among the error history data stored in the RAM 91c is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the first type is executed. Since the events of the first type include events that are more important than any of the events included in the second type of event, the first type including the events that are more important than any of the events included in the second type of event. In the case of executing the detailed history display for displaying the event occurrence history of the above on the liquid crystal display 51, the second type of the simple history display for displaying the occurrence history of the second type of event on the liquid crystal display 51 is executed. Since the first operation is required instead of the operation, the second type of events that are not relatively important can be browsed by a simple operation, while the first including relatively important events can be viewed. Since the types of events are not displayed in the simple history display, browsing can be restricted.

In this embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 is configured to display the contents of the error history data stored in the RAM 91c on the liquid crystal display 51 according to the display mode of the character string when the predetermined output condition is satisfied. However, when displaying the contents of the error history data on the liquid crystal display 51, an image encoded in a two-dimensional code or the like may be displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the sub control unit 91 is configured to display the contents of the error history data stored in the RAM 91c on the liquid crystal display 51 when the predetermined output condition is satisfied, but the predetermined output. When the condition is satisfied, the content of the error history data stored in the RAM 91c may be output by an electromagnetic signal or the like that can be specified by an external device.

Further, in the present embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 displays any event included in the second type of event in the detailed history display for displaying the occurrence history of the first type of event in the error history data on the liquid crystal display 51. More important events are medal payout error (E4), medal insertion error (E5), abnormal winning error (E7), RAM error (E8), setting change error, RAM clear (setting change), door open, door close. , Communication error, sub-control unit error, and information related to clearing the game history are displayed, but the important event may be an event that is relatively more important than the second type event. ..

The first type of event is information that can be inferred that an operation related to the first operation has been performed as an important event (for example, change of advantage for the player, power ON / OFF, door). (Events such as opening of) and events suggesting the possibility of occurrence of fraudulent events (information on medals selector 29 errors, communication errors, etc.) It may include other events such as events of relatively low importance.

Further, in the present embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 displays the entire contents of the error history data in the detailed history display for displaying the occurrence history of the first type of event on the liquid crystal display 51, while displaying the second type. In the simple history display in which the occurrence history of the above-mentioned event is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, the display of important events among the events included in the first type of events is restricted, and some of the events that are not relatively important events. It is a configuration in which only events are displayed, and the first type of event displayed in the detailed history display and the second type of event displayed in the simple history display are configured to partially overlap, but the first A configuration in which one type of event and the second type of event do not overlap may be used.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment can set a setting value which is advantageous for the player by operating the setting key switch 37, and the sub control unit 91 is advantageous as an important event in the simple history display. Since the occurrence history of the second type event including setting change error, RAM clear (setting change), door opening, and door closing, which can identify or guess that the setting of the degree has been changed, is displayed, the player can see it. It is possible to limit the viewing of events that can be identified or inferred that the setting of the advantage of has been changed.

As the first operation, the sub-control unit 91 of this embodiment executes the detailed history display when a predetermined output condition including the operation of the setting key switch 37 is satisfied, while as the second operation. The simple history display is executed when a predetermined output condition including that the effect switch 56 is operated in the operation mode of long press is satisfied, and the operation of the setting key switch 37 as the first operation is This is an operation that can be performed by a person who has a predetermined setting key and has the authority to set the advantage, and the operation in the operation mode of long-pressing the effect switch 56 as the second operation sets the advantage. Since it is an operation that can be performed regardless of whether or not the person has the authority to perform the operation, the setting key is possessed and the setting key switch 37 can be operated to view the event that can identify or infer that the setting of the advantage has been changed. Can be restricted to those who are capable of doing this, that is, those who have the authority to set the advantage.

In this embodiment, as the first operation, the sub control unit 91 executes the detailed history display when a predetermined output condition including the operation of the setting key switch 37 is satisfied. , The first operation may be any operation that can be performed by a person who has the authority to set the advantage, and input of a predetermined password, code, etc. that can be known only by the person who has the authority to set the advantage. , Operation of predetermined switches in a predetermined operation order, connection operation of a predetermined external device, or the like.

The sub-control unit 91 of this embodiment has a configuration in which the detailed history display screen or the simple history display screen can be displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 when a predetermined output condition is satisfied, and the detailed history display screen and the simple history display screen and the simple history display screen can be displayed. On the history display screen, the date and time when a predetermined event occurs is displayed, and the current date and time acquired by the clock device 97 is also displayed on the history display screen. You can check the occurrence status of the event while comparing.

The sub-control unit 91 of this embodiment includes a RAM 91c that can store control state data that is data used for controlling the effect and error history data that is data of the occurrence history of a predetermined event related to the slot machine 1. Is provided with a control state data area capable of storing control state data as a first storage area and an error history data area capable of storing error history data as a second storage area. When the output condition is satisfied, the contents of the error history data stored in the error history data area can be displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped. , The control state data stored in the first storage area and the error history data stored in the second storage area are held by the backup RAM 61 capable of holding the stored data even when the power supply is stopped. When the data is started and the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, it is determined whether or not the initialization condition is satisfied, and when it is determined that the initialization condition is satisfied, the data is held by the backup RAM 61. Since the control state data is initialized and the error history data is retained without being initialized, even if the initialization condition is satisfied and the data held by the backup RAM 61 is initialized, the control state data is initialized. , It is possible to specify the occurrence history of a predetermined event before the initialization condition is satisfied.

In this embodiment, the sub control unit 91 is a storage means separate from the RAM 91c included in the sub control unit 91, and is a backup RAM 61 in which data is held even if the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped. Although the configuration is such that the stored data of the RAM 91c can be retained, the RAM 91c itself may be configured to be capable of retaining the stored data even if the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped.

Further, in the present embodiment, the sub control unit 91 stores the data stored in the RAM 91c in the RAM 91c with respect to the backup RAM 61 in which the data is held even if the power supply is stopped separately from the RAM 91c. It is configured to hold the stored data, and when the initialization condition is satisfied when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, the control state data among the data stored in the backup RAM 61 is stored in the RAM 91c. By initializing without duplicating to, the control state data stored in the RAM 91c before the power supply is stopped is not restored to the RAM 91c, but when the initialization condition is satisfied, the backup RAM 61 is used. By not replicating and initializing the control state data among the stored data to the RAM 91c, the control state data stored in the RAM 91c may not be returned to the RAM 91c before the power supply is stopped.

The sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment can display the occurrence history of a predetermined event related to the slot machine 1 such as an error on the liquid crystal display 51 by performing a predetermined operation with the front door 1b open. It is a possible configuration.

In such a configuration, the clerk of the game hall originally displays the occurrence history of these events on the liquid crystal display 51 and confirms it, but for example, the error is eliminated in the situation where the player is playing the game. Therefore, even when the front door 1b is opened, there is a possibility that the occurrence history of the event related to the slot machine 1 may be displayed due to an erroneous predetermined operation.

On the other hand, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can control the error state by detecting a predetermined error related to the slot machine 1, and the error state eliminates the cause of the error. The sub-control unit 91 stores the occurrence history of a plurality of types of events related to the slot machine 1 in the RAM 91c as error history data. When the predetermined output conditions are satisfied, the contents of the error history data can be displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. As the predetermined output conditions, the front door 1b is in the open state and the predetermined output conditions are satisfied. If the front door 1b is in the open state after being controlled to the error state on the main control unit 41 side including the operation, and before the error state is released, the predetermined operation is performed. However, since the content of the error history data is not displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, in the situation where the front door 1b is opened to eliminate the cause of the error, the content of the error history data is displayed even if a predetermined operation is performed during that time. Since it is not displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, it is possible to prevent the occurrence history of a predetermined event related to the slot machine 1 from being erroneously output in a situation where the player is playing a game.

In this embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 is configured to display the contents of the error history data stored in the RAM 91c on the liquid crystal display 51 according to the display mode of the character string when the predetermined output condition is satisfied. However, when displaying the contents of the error history data on the liquid crystal display 51, an image encoded in a two-dimensional code or the like may be displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the sub control unit 91 is configured to display the contents of the error history data stored in the RAM 91c on the liquid crystal display 51 when the predetermined output condition is satisfied, but the predetermined output. When the condition is satisfied, the content of the error history data stored in the RAM 91c may be output by an electromagnetic signal or the like that can be specified by an external device.

In the sub control unit 91 of this embodiment, the sub control unit 91 stores the error history data in the RAM 91c, and when a predetermined output condition is satisfied, the content of the error history data can be displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. It is a possible configuration, and as a predetermined output condition, the front door 1b is in an open state and a predetermined operation is performed, and after being controlled to an error state on the main control unit 41 side, the error state is changed. If the front door 1b is opened before it is released, then if the error state is released, the error history is performed even if a predetermined operation is performed before the front door 1b is closed. Since the content of the data is not displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, in the situation where the front door 1b is opened to eliminate the cause of the error, the content of the error history data is displayed on the liquid crystal display even if a predetermined operation is performed during that time. Since it is not displayed on the 51, it is possible to prevent the occurrence history of a predetermined event related to the slot machine 1 from being erroneously output in a situation where the player is playing a game.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment controls the error state by detecting, for example, that the overflow tank is full or the hopper is out of medals as a predetermined error regarding the slot machine 1. These error states require the opening of the front door 1b to eliminate the cause of the error, and the sub-control unit 91 includes a plurality of predetermined errors related to the slot machine 1 in the RAM 91c. The configuration is such that the occurrence history of various types of events is stored as error history data, and the contents of the error history data can be displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 by satisfying the output conditions including the predetermined operation. As a predetermined error, the operation is an operation in a long press operation mode of the effect switch 56, which is different from the operation for canceling that the overflow tank is full or the hopper is out of medals, for example. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the contents of the error history data from being displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 in the same flow as the operation for canceling the error state.

Although examples and modifications of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the present invention is not limited to the present invention, and the present invention is not limited to the present invention, and the present invention may be changed or added without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Needless to say, it is included in.

In the above-described embodiment and modification, an example in which the present invention is applied to a slot machine in which a bet number is set by using a medal and a credit as a game value has been described, but the bet number is determined by using a game ball as a game value. It may be applied to a slot machine to be set or a fully credited slot machine to set the number of bets using only credit as a game value. When the game ball is used as the game value, for example, one medal can be associated with five game balls, and when the bet number is set to 3 in the above embodiment, 15 game balls are used. Corresponds to setting the number of bets using.

Further, the value is not limited to one using only one of a plurality of types of game values such as medals and game balls, and for example, a plurality of types of game values such as medals and game balls can be used together. It may be. That is, it is possible to set the number of bets and play a game by using any of a plurality of types of game values such as medals and game balls, and a plurality of types of games such as medals and game balls are generated depending on the occurrence of a prize. You may apply a slot machine that can pay out any value.

Further, in the above-mentioned Examples and Modifications, an example in which the present invention is applied to the slot machine 1 which is an example of a gaming machine has been shown, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and the present invention is used for gaming. It may be applied to other gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines that play games by firing a gaming ball in the area.

1 Slot machine 2L, 2C, 2R reel 6 MAXBET switch 7 Start switch 8L, 8C, 8R Stop switch 41 Main control unit 61 Backup RAM
62 Backup battery 91 Sub control unit 91c RAM

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine that plays games
The first control means and
A second control means that controls according to the control information received from the first control means, and a second control means.
Equipped with
The first control means is
The main process execution means that executes the main process that is gradually migrated,
An interrupt processing execution means that interrupts the main processing at regular intervals and executes the interrupt processing,
A control information generation means that generates control information in the main process and stores it in the control information storage area.
A control information transmitting means for transmitting control information stored in the control information storage area to the second control means in the interrupt processing, and a control information transmitting means.
Including
The interrupt processing executing means can execute a process of updating operation information indicating an operation state of a switch provided in the gaming machine in the interrupt process.
The main processing execution means is
It is possible to execute an interrupt waiting process that waits until the interrupt process interrupts the main process and is executed once.
With stepwise migration of the main process based on the operation information, it is capable of executing the pre-Symbol interruption waiting process before referring to the operation information,
When a plurality of control information is generated continuously by the previous SL control information generating means, processing common to be performed prior to referring to the operation information after the generation of the product or in a plurality of control information for a plurality of control information A delay means for delaying the progress of the main process by executing the interrupt wait process is included.
The control information generation means generates a plurality of types of state control information capable of specifying the control state of the first control means for each of a plurality of timings including the first timing and the second timing in the unit game which is one unit game. Including state control information generation means to
The plurality of types of state control information generated by the state control information generation means at one timing are control states that can be changed between one unit game and another unit game, and are the first timing and the first timing in one unit game. It includes first state control information that can specify a control state that does not change at two timings, and second state control information that can specify a control state that can change at the first timing and the second timing in one unit game.
The state control information generation means is a gaming machine that generates a plurality of types of common state control information by common control at any of the plurality of timings.

Images